JP2014223101A - System for game, device for game, and management device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system, a game device and a management device, which can prevent a game machine from running outside of a business hour.SOLUTION: A game system comprises: a pachinko machine 2 installed in a game house; card units 3 connected with the pachinko machine 2; and a hall server 801 connected with the card units 3 for managing the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3. The hall server 801 sets the business information containing information capable of specifying the business finishing time of the game house, decides whether or not the present time has elapsed the business finish time, and sends the business end information indicating that the business finish time has elapsed, to the pachinko machine 2. This pachinko machine 2 reports the end of the business of the game house on the basis of the business end information.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system, a gaming apparatus, and a management apparatus for enabling gaming by a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a player can determine whether or not to continue a game near the closing time (Patent Document 1). Specifically, the gaming machine acquires current time data indicating the current time, and calculates the remaining time from the current time to the stored closing time. When the calculated time is, for example, 30 minutes before the closing time set by the player, the gaming machine displays the remaining time on the front panel of the liquid crystal display device.

  In addition, in order to improve the appearance of the hall at the time of opening the store, for example, in order to uniformly display the outcomes of all slot machines installed in the hall, when it is determined that it is outside business hours, each rotating reel A gaming machine is disclosed in which each rotation reel is stopped so that a predetermined symbol is displayed on a symbol display window (Patent Document 2).

JP 2008-104676 A JP 2008-005947 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since it is necessary to provide an internal clock for acquiring current time data, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine becomes expensive, and the liquid crystal display devices of a plurality of gaming machines when the store is closed In order to display the closing screen at the same time, it is necessary to synchronize the internal clock in advance between a plurality of gaming machines.

  Furthermore, even if it is set to prevent the gaming machine from operating outside business hours, it is possible to easily operate the gaming machine even outside business hours by changing the time of the internal clock. .

  Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, it is possible to operate the gaming machine outside the business hours only by operating each rotating reel so that a predetermined symbol is displayed on the symbol display window outside the business hours. It has not been done until prevention.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming system, a gaming apparatus, and a management apparatus capable of preventing the gaming machine from operating outside business hours. It is to be.

(1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), slot machine without medals (S 2S)) installed in a game hall, and the gaming machine A connected gaming device (CU3, call lamp device, etc.) and a management device (for example, a key management server 800 outside the store or the like) connected to the plurality of gaming devices and managing the gaming machine and the gaming device A management center, a hall server 801 in the store, a hall control, etc.),
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the game hall (FIG. 31 (1), FIG. 34 (1A): Hall server 801, FIG. 35 (1B): management center 800B, , Setting the sales information in the setting means means setting the contents of the sales information, for example, entering and registering the business end time)
Based on the sales information set by the setting unit (for example, the sales information stored in advance may be used as a determination criterion, or the sales information inquired to the setting unit at the time of determination may be used as a determination criterion). Determining means for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time (FIG. 31 (2), FIG. 35 (2B): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (3A): CU3);
When the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time, the business end information (for example, business end flag information or business end time information) indicating that the business end time has passed is Transmission means (FIG. 31 (3), FIG. 35 (3B): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (4A): CU3) for transmitting to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Receiving means for receiving the business end information transmitted by the transmitting means (received by the P unit 2);
Based on the end-of-business information, notification means for notifying that the game hall has ended (for example, displaying an end-of-business image on the variable display device 278 of the P stand 2 or the display 312 of the CU 3, 2 to output an end sound from the second speaker 270).

  According to the above configuration, the closing information is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the gaming machine notifies the closing of the game hall, so that the player recognizes the closing of the gaming hall and the opening hours. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating outside.

(2) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), slot machine without medals (S 2S)) installed in a game hall, and the gaming machine A connected gaming device (CU3, call lamp device, etc.) and a management device (for example, a key management server 800 outside the store or the like) connected to the plurality of gaming devices and managing the gaming machine and the gaming device A management center, a hall server 801 in the store, a hall control, etc.),
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the game hall (FIG. 31 (1), FIG. 34 (1A): Hall server 801, FIG. 35 (1B): management center 800B, , Setting the sales information in the setting means means setting the contents of the sales information, for example, entering and registering the business end time)
Based on the sales information set by the setting unit (for example, the sales information stored in advance may be used as a determination criterion, or the sales information inquired to the setting unit at the time of determination may be used as a determination criterion). Determining means for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time (FIG. 31 (2), FIG. 35 (2B): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (3A): CU3);
When the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time, the business end information (for example, business end flag information or business end time information) indicating that the business end time has passed is Transmission means (FIG. 31 (3), FIG. 35 (3B): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (4A): CU3) for transmitting to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Receiving means for receiving the business end information transmitted by the transmitting means (received by the P unit 2);
Based on the end-of-business information, limiting means for limiting the game on the gaming machine (for example, controlling the launch motor 18 of the P stand 2 to stop the launch of the game ball or pressing the ball lending button 321) Are also prohibited from lending to game balls, or the symbol variation on the variable display device 278 of the P stand 2 is stopped.).

  According to the above configuration, the business end information is transmitted to the gaming machine and the game on the gaming machine is restricted, so that the player can recognize that the business of the game hall has ended and the gaming machine is operated outside the business hours. Can be prevented.

(3) In the above (1) or (2),
Storage means (FIG. 31, FIG. 35: storage unit E, FIG. 34: storage unit A) for storing the business end information received by the reception unit,
The notification means notifies that the game hall has ended based on the business end information stored in the storage means.

  According to the above configuration, since the transmitted business end information is stored, it is possible to notify that the game hall business has ended until the storage is erased, and that the gaming machine operates outside business hours. Can be prevented. In particular, when a storage device is provided in a gaming machine, even if the gaming machine is removed from the gaming device after the closing information is transmitted, it can be notified that the game hall has been closed.

(4) In the above (1) or (2),
Storage means (FIG. 31, FIG. 35: storage unit E, FIG. 34: storage unit A) for storing the business end information received by the reception unit,
The restricting means restricts a game in the gaming machine based on the business end information stored in the storage means.

  According to the above configuration, since the transmitted business end information is stored, it is possible to limit gaming at the gaming machine until the memory is erased, and prevent the gaming machine from operating outside business hours. be able to. In particular, in the case where a storage unit is provided in the gaming machine, even if the gaming machine is removed from the gaming device after the closing information is transmitted, the gaming in the gaming machine can be limited.

(5) In the above (1),
The setting means sets the sales information including information that can specify the business start time of the game hall (FIG. 31 (1), FIG. 34 (1A): Hall server 801, FIG. 35 (1B): management center) 800B)
The determination means further determines whether or not the current time is the business start time of the game hall based on the business information (FIG. 31 (5): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (6A): CU3, FIG. 35). (5B): Management Center 800B)
The transmission means, when the determination means determines that the current time is the business start time, the business start information (for example, business start flag information and business start time information indicating that the business start time has been reached) Etc.) (FIG. 31 (6), FIG. 35 (6B): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (7A): CU3)
The notification means stops notification that the game hall has ended based on the business start information transmitted by the transmission means.

  According to the above configuration, since the business start information is transmitted to the gaming machine and the notification that the game hall business has ended is stopped, the gaming machine is prevented from operating until the business start information is transmitted to the gaming machine. can do.

(6) In (2) above,
The setting means sets the sales information including information that can specify the business start time of the game hall (FIG. 31 (1), FIG. 34 (1A): Hall server 801, FIG. 35 (1B): management center) 800B)
The determination means further determines whether or not the current time is the business start time of the game hall based on the business information (FIG. 31 (5): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (6A): CU3, FIG. 35). (5B): Management Center 800B)
The transmission means, when the determination means determines that the current time is the business start time, the business start information (for example, business start flag information and business start time information indicating that the business start time has been reached) Etc.) (FIG. 31 (6), FIG. 35 (6B): Hall server 801, FIG. 34 (7A): CU3)
The restriction means releases the restriction on the game machine based on the business start information transmitted by the transmission means.

  According to the above configuration, since the business start information is transmitted to the gaming machine and the restriction of the game on the gaming machine is released, the gaming machine is prevented from operating until the business start information is transmitted to the gaming machine. Can do.

(7) In (1) above,
The gaming machine is
Based on a specific gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit state, a probable change state, a short time state, etc.), the notification mode changing means (for example, the variable display device 278 is changed to the notification mode changing means). Etc.) are further provided.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification mode of the notification means is changed based on the specific game state, it is possible to notify that the business of the game hall has ended without detriment to the player.

(8) In (2) above,
The gaming machine is
Restricted content changing means (for example, effect image is variably displayed) for changing the restricted content in the restricting means based on a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit state, a probable change state, a short time state, etc.) where the gaming state is advantageous to the player And the like.

  According to the above configuration, since the notification mode of the notification means is changed based on the specific game state, it is possible to notify that the business of the game hall has ended without detriment to the player.

(9) In (3) above,
The storage means further stores operation history information indicating whether or not an operation that can be detected by the gaming machine (for example, a power-on operation of the P platform 2 or an opening / closing operation of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5) has been performed. To do.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating outside the business hours, and to store an operation performed on the gaming machine outside the business hours (for example, opening the glass door 6). Can do.

(10) The present invention is for games connected to gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, enclosed circulation pachinko machines (P 2), slot machines without medals (S 2S)) installed in the game hall. A device (CU3, call lamp device, etc.),
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the amusement hall (setting sales information in the CU3. The setting of sales information in the setting means is performed by, for example, inputting the business end time. Setting the contents of sales information such as registration)
Based on the sales information set by the setting unit (for example, the sales information stored in advance may be used as a determination criterion, or the sales information inquired to the setting unit at the time of determination may be used as a determination criterion). Determining means (FIG. 34 (3A): CU3) for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time;
Transmission means for transmitting to the gaming machine business end information for notifying the elapse of the business end time when the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time (FIG. 34 (4A)). : CU3).

  According to the above configuration, the closing information is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the gaming machine notifies the closing of the game hall, so that the player recognizes the closing of the gaming hall and the opening hours. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating outside.

(11) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), slot machine without medals (S 2S)) installed in a game hall, and the gaming machine A management device (for example, a key management server 800 outside the store, a management center, a hall server 801 inside the store) that manages the connected game devices (CU3, call lamp device, etc.) and is connected to the plurality of game devices. Or Hallcon)
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the amusement hall (FIG. 31 (1): hall server 801). And setting the contents of sales information such as registering)
Based on the sales information set by the setting unit (for example, the sales information stored in advance may be used as a determination criterion, or the sales information inquired to the setting unit at the time of determination may be used as a determination criterion). Determination means (FIG. 31 (2): hall server 801) for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time;
Transmitting means for transmitting, to the gaming machine, business end information for notifying the elapse of the business end time when the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time (FIG. 31 (3)). : Hall server 801).

  According to the above configuration, the closing information is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the gaming machine notifies the closing of the game hall, so that the player recognizes the closing of the gaming hall and the opening hours. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating outside.

(12) The present invention is for a game machine connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), medal-free slot machine (S 2S)) installed in a game hall. A device (CU3, call lamp device, etc.),
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the amusement hall (setting sales information in the CU3. The setting of sales information in the setting means is performed by, for example, inputting the business end time. Setting the contents of sales information such as registration)
Based on the sales information set by the setting unit (for example, the sales information stored in advance may be used as a determination criterion, or the sales information inquired to the setting unit at the time of determination may be used as a determination criterion). Determining means (FIG. 34 (3A): CU3) for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time;
Transmitting means for transmitting, to the gaming machine, business end information for restricting a game on the gaming machine when the determining means determines that the current time has passed the business ending time (FIG. 34 (4A)). : CU3).

  According to the above configuration, the business end information is transmitted to the gaming machine and the game on the gaming machine is restricted, so that the player recognizes that the business of the game hall has ended, and the gaming machine operates outside the business hours. Can be prevented.

(13) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, sealed circulation pachinko machine (P 2), slot machine without medals (S 2S)) installed in a game hall, and the gaming machine A management device (for example, a key management server 800 outside the store, a management center, a hall server 801 inside the store) that manages the connected game devices (CU3, call lamp device, etc.) and is connected to the plurality of game devices. Or Hallcon)
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the amusement hall (FIG. 31 (1): hall server 801). And setting the contents of sales information such as registering)
Based on the sales information set by the setting unit (for example, the sales information stored in advance may be used as a determination criterion, or the sales information inquired to the setting unit at the time of determination may be used as a determination criterion). Determination means (FIG. 31 (2): hall server 801) for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time;
When the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time, transmission means for transmitting business end information for restricting a game in the gaming machine to the gaming machine (FIG. 31 (3)) : Hall server 801).

  According to the above configuration, since the closing information is transmitted to the gaming machine and the gaming on the gaming machine is restricted, the player is made aware that the gaming hall has been closed and the player is allowed to operate the gaming hall. Recognizing that the game has ended, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from operating outside business hours.

(1-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a prize, and the gaming machine so as to be communicable, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 6: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 13). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 13: P table 2 sends a status information response command including information of count request = ON when there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the gaming points to the points (FIG. 13: CU3 is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 1: a card insertion / ejecting port 309 for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by a player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 13: CU3 is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 13: CU3 returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 13: CU3 prepares for card return when card removal is possible) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal ON is sent to the P stand 2).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(1-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P unit 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses the valuable value owned by the player to play a game in the gaming machine. A gaming device (CU3) that enables
Count processing means for counting the gaming points based on the counting request from the gaming machine (FIG. 13: When the CU3 receives a status information response including information of counting request = ON, the requested counting ball And add the number to the number of balls.)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 1: a card insertion / ejecting port 309 for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by a player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 13: CU3 is inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309) for processing the holding points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 13: CU3 returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 13: CU3 prepares for card return when card removal is possible) The P table 2 is notified of information indicating that the state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(1-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming device (CU3) that enables a game using a valuable value owned by a player so as to be communicable, and gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs ( P stand 2)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 6: game ball counter);
Count for counting the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 13). Count request transmission means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 13: P table 2 sends a status information response command including information of count request = ON when there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. To send to
When the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are processed in a manner that can be specified by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, the recording medium is awaiting removal. A notification that the card is ready can be received from the gaming device (FIG. 13: When the card 2 is ready for card removal, the CU 3 notifies the CU 3 of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Receive.)

  According to the above configuration, since the game device receives a notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in a removal waiting state, the game machine prompts the player to remove the recording medium. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(1-4) In the above (1-1) to (1-3),
The gaming device includes notification means (for example, the indicator 312 shown in FIG. 1) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(1-5) In the above (1-1) to (1-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278 shown in FIG. 1) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed based on a notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify the gaming machine that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented.

(1-6) In the above (1-1) or (1-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming device or a device connected to the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on P units) that the recording medium is waiting to be removed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium by notifying a device other than the gaming machine or gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

(1-7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P 2) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 1: a card insertion / ejecting port 309 for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by a player;
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, a game hall specifying information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the gaming apparatus is installed (FIG. 9). When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325 to the P base 2).
The gaming machine is
Game hall identification information storage means for storing the game hall identification information notified by the game hall identification information notification means (FIG. 9: P stand 2 stores “store code” included in the insertion notification command). ,
The game room specifying information newly notified by the game hall specifying information notifying means when the communication is restored after recovering from the communication incapable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate, and the game hall specifying When a recovery request including a “store code” is transmitted from the CU 3 to the game hall specifying information comparing means for comparison with the game hall specifying information stored in the information storage means, the “store code” ”And the stored“ store code ”are determined to match.)
The game prohibition means for prohibiting the continuation of the game when the game hall specific information comparison means determines that the game hall specific information is inconsistent (P table 2 stores “store code” from CU3. If the store code does not match, continuation of the game is prohibited.)

  According to the above configuration, if the newly notified game hall specifying information and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the store is moved in the stored state.

(1-8) In the above (1-7),
The gaming device is:
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, security board 325 shown in FIG. 4) included in the gaming device when the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means and when the communication is restored. Device specific information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of specific information (SC board ID) (FIG. 9: When the card is received at the card insertion / ejecting port 309, the CU 3 receives the “SC board ID” added by the security board 325. And a card insertion notification command including:
The gaming machine is
Device specifying information storage means for storing the device specifying information notified by the device specifying information notifying means (FIG. 9: P platform 2 stores “SC board ID” included in the insertion notification command);
When the communication is restored, the device specifying information comparing unit P 2 for comparing the device specifying information newly notified by the device specifying information notifying unit with the device specifying information stored in the device specifying information storing unit is: , “SC board ID” from CU3 is compared with the stored “SC board ID”. ) And
The game prohibiting means prohibits continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information is inconsistent (in the case of mismatch, prohibiting continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly notified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the game is prohibited from being continued, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. Unauthorized movement of the gaming machine in the state can be prevented.

(1-9) In the above (1-7) or (1-8) above,
The gaming machine is
A game hall specifying information reading means for reading the game hall specifying information added to the game medium used for the game (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passage path of the P stand 2, and the sensor is provided in the game ball. Read certain identification information (such as surface markings).
The game hall specifying information comparing means includes the game hall specifying information added to the game medium read by the game hall specifying information reading means, and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means. Compare (by the read identification information, it is determined whether or not it matches the identification information of the game ball of the own store, and in the case of a mismatch, the Bit 0 of the “illegal detection state 3” of the status information response is set to “1”. To do.)

  According to the above configuration, if the game hall identification information added to the game medium read by the game hall identification information reading means and the game hall identification information stored in the game hall identification information storage means do not match, the game medium It is possible to notify that game balls from other stores are mixed.

(2-1) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P unit 2, S unit 2S) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicable. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a balance, stored balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.,
The gaming device is:
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer) for reading player specifying information (C-ID (card ID) or the like) for specifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (the CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (card ID is notified by card insertion notification in FIG. 9). Notification)
The gaming machine is
Storage means (FIG. 9: backup card ID) for storing player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means;
When the game is finished, transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player specifying information stored in the storage means to the gaming device (FIG. 13: P table 2 is backed up by a card return response. Send C-ID)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter in FIG. 6);
Conversion request transmitting means for transmitting a conversion request for converting the gaming point to the holding point to the gaming device based on an operation (counting) for converting the gaming point into a predetermined holding point (FIG. 13: FIG. 13). P table 2 includes a count request = ON state information request is transmitted)
The gaming device is:
Based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmission means, a conversion process for converting the gaming points into the holding points is executed (FIG. 13: the number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls) and the conversion is performed. A conversion processing means for returning a conversion approval indicating that the request has been accepted to the gaming machine (FIG. 13: sending a count response = ON state information request);
Identical determination for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information transmitted by the control of the transmission control means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means It further includes means (FIG. 13: coincidence determination between the C-ID stored from the time of card insertion on the CU3 side and the C-ID notified by the card return response).

  According to such a configuration, the game points are converted into points based on the conversion operation, and the same game is determined by the player specification information transmitted from the gaming machine and the player specification information stored at the start of the game. By determining whether or not the player is specified, it is possible to determine the identity between the information specifying the player at the start of the game and the information specifying the player at the end of the game. Further, it is possible to end the game based on the determination result, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game is ended by a player different from the player at the start of the game.

(2-2) The present invention includes a connection unit for connecting to a gaming machine (P unit 2, S unit 2S) that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs, and is valuable to the player. A gaming device (CU3) that enables games on the gaming machine using (balance, stored balls, number of gaming balls, cash, etc.),
Player specifying information reading means (card reader / writer) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means (the CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer);
When starting a game, player identification information transmission control means for controlling to transmit the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (card ID is notified by card insertion notification in FIG. 9). Notification)
Stored in the player specifying information storage means and the player specifying information transmitted from the gaming machine storing the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means when the game is ended. The same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified based on the player specifying information (FIG. 13: C-ID stored from the time of card insertion on the CU3 side and the card return response Match determination with the C-ID notified in the above),
Based on a conversion request from the gaming machine based on an operation (counting operation) for converting the game points into predetermined points, a conversion process for converting the game points into the points is executed (FIG. 13: Add the number of counting balls to the number of holding balls) and return a conversion approval indicating that the conversion request has been accepted to the gaming machine (FIG. 13: Send a count response = ON status information request) including.

  According to such a configuration, the game points are converted into points based on the conversion operation, and the same game is determined by the player specification information transmitted from the gaming machine and the player specification information stored at the start of the game. By determining whether or not the player is specified, it is possible to determine the identity between the information specifying the player at the start of the game and the information specifying the player at the end of the game. Further, it is possible to end the game based on the determination result, and it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the game is ended by a player different from the player at the start of the game.

(2-3) In the game system of (2-1) or the game device of (2-2),
The gaming device is:
A game hall specifying information storage means (CU3 stores a store code in which the game apparatus is installed) that stores game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the game apparatus is installed;
Control device identification information storage means (CU3 stores SC substrate ID) for storing control device identification information (SC substrate ID) capable of identifying the control device (security chip 325b) provided in the gaming device;
A recording medium receiving means (card insertion / ejecting port 309) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a gaming value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means and the control device specifying information stored in the control apparatus specifying information storage means It further includes transmitting means for transmitting to the gaming machine (FIG. 9: transmitting store code and SC board ID by card insertion notification when a card is inserted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the game hall specifying information and the control device specifying information are the same.

(2-4) In the game system of (2-1) or the game device of (2-2),
The gaming device is:
Including a recording medium receiving means (card insertion / ejecting port 309) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying the player's gaming value;
The recording medium accepting means returns the accepted recording medium only when all the game points are converted into the possession points based on the conversion request transmitted from the conversion request transmitting means (FIG. 13: If game points remain during the card return operation, a count button operation is prompted, and card return processing is executed on condition that the game ball has become 0 by the count operation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the recording medium from being returned with game points remaining in the gaming machine.

(3-1) The present invention is an information management device (for example, CU3, hallcon 900, call lamp) capable of communicating with a gaming machine capable of launching a gaming medium into a gaming area and performing a game,
A signal (for example, a status information response indicating the launch intensity) output from the gaming machine and a first area where the game medium is provided in the game area (for example, normal winning holes 272 to 274). , A signal (for example, a passing area) indicating that the winning winning opening 271, the starting winning opening 275 to 277, one of a plurality of areas including at least one of a normal symbol gate and a stage entrance is passed. Status information response) and a second area in which the game medium is provided in the gaming area (for example, at least one of a normal winning port 272-274, a big winning port 271, a starting winning port 275-277, a normal symbol gate, or a stage entrance) A signal indicating that the vehicle has passed through one of the plurality of regions including the first region and a region different from the first region (for example, a state indicating the passage region) And acquisition means for acquiring a broadcast response) and (S10 in FIG. 42),
Using the signal received by the acquisition means, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are each determined as the firing strength. A totaling unit (for example, S13 in FIG. 42) that performs a totaling process for totaling is provided.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are tabulated for each firing strength. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which area the game medium tends to pass according to the launch intensity (ease of passing through each area according to the launch intensity). In addition, when grasping | ascertaining the ease of passage of each area | region according to discharge | release intensity | strength, you may make it compare the frequency | count of a 1st area | region and the passage ratio of a 2nd area, for example.

(3-2) In the information management apparatus of (3-1),
The first area starts a predetermined game control (for example, a control for paying out a game ball, a control for giving data on the number of game balls in an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and a variation of a symbol when a game medium passes through the first area. Control, etc.)
The second area starts predetermined game control (for example, control for paying out a game ball, control for giving data on the number of game balls in an encircling pachinko machine, and variation in symbols when a game medium passes through. A region where control or the like is performed, and a region different from the first region.

  According to the above configuration, when there are a plurality of different areas where predetermined game control is performed, it is determined which of the plurality of areas the game medium tends to pass according to the launch intensity. can do.

(3-3) The present invention is an information management device (for example, CU3, hallcon 900, call lamp) that can communicate with a gaming machine that can play a game by launching a game medium to the game area,
A signal (for example, a status information response indicating the launch intensity) output from the gaming machine and indicating the launch intensity of the game medium, and a first area (eg, a prize winning opening 271) in which the game medium is provided in the game area. A signal indicating that it has passed (for example, a status information response indicating a passing area) and a game medium that has passed through a second area (for example, a probable change winning opening 271a in the big winning opening 271) disposed in the first area. An acquisition means (for example, S10 in FIG. 42) for acquiring a signal indicating that (for example, a state information response indicating a passing area);
Using the signal received by the acquisition means, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area are each determined as the firing strength. A totaling unit (for example, S13 in FIG. 42) that performs a totaling process for totaling is provided.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the second area arranged in the first area are classified according to the firing strength. Since the counting is performed, it is possible to grasp at which launch strength the game medium passes through the first region and easily passes through the second region in the first region.

(3-4) In the information management apparatus of (3-3),
The first area is a variable winning area (for example, a big winning opening 271) that can be changed between a closed state in which a game medium is difficult to win or not winning and an open state in which a game medium can be won.
The second area is a probability-variation winning opening (for example, a probability changing winning opening 271a) that is arranged in the variable winning area and that increases the probability that a predetermined game control is performed by winning a game medium.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp at which launch strength the game medium passes through the variable winning area and easily passes through the probability variation winning opening arranged in the variable winning area.

(3-5) In the information management device according to any one of (3-1) to (3-4) above,
Using the result of the counting process, at least one of the number and ratio of game media passing through the first area and at least one of the number of games media passing through the second area and at least one of the ratio are displayed according to the firing strength. Possible display means (for example, S16 in FIG. 42) is further provided.

  According to the above configuration, by displaying the total result, it is possible to visually grasp which region the game medium tends to pass according to the launch intensity.

(3-6) In the information management device according to any one of (3-1) to (3-5) above,
The aggregating means is fired during a predetermined period (for example, during a change in the firing intensity) after at least the firing intensity has changed by a predetermined amount (for example, an amount by which the firing intensity reaches a threshold value from a value lower than the threshold value). The totaling process is not performed during a period (for example, a period α shown in FIG. 44) until a period when all the game media are predicted to finish passing through the game area.

  According to the above configuration, at least during the period from when the firing intensity changes by a predetermined amount until the predetermined period elapses, the passing area of the game medium is predicted to be unstable, and thus the aggregation process is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the totalization processing result from decreasing.

(3-7) In the information management device according to any one of (3-1) to (3-6) above,
In order to change the launching intensity received from the gaming machine immediately after the gaming machine is operated (for example, immediately after turning on the power, immediately after starting the game, or immediately after the launching intensity starts increasing from substantially zero), the gaming machine Is stored as an initial launch intensity when the amount of operation of the operation unit provided in is approximately zero (for example, a value at the time of non-operation), and the launch intensity received from the gaming machine after storing the initial launch intensity Further provided is a correcting means (for example, the flowchart of FIG. 43) for correcting with the initial firing intensity.

  According to the above configuration, even when there is a variation between the operation amount of the operation unit and the emission intensity due to play or play of the operation unit, for example, the emission intensity can be accurately detected.

(3-8) In the information management device according to any one of (3-1) to (3-7) above,
The information management device determines that the gaming medium is abnormally emitted when the firing strength is greater than approximately zero (for example, a value when not operated) and the number of games played and the number of collected games do not change. The determination means (for example, the flowchart of FIG. 49) to perform is further provided.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality of the operation unit or a state in which a shooting operation is being performed even though no game medium is supplied to the launching device (so-called “coloring”).

(3-9) In the information management device according to any one of (3-1) to (3-8) above,
An area (for example, right-handed) in which a game medium is driven according to whether or not the firing strength is greater than or equal to a threshold value or whether or not it falls within a threshold range (for example, the firing strength threshold range in FIG. 51). Specifying means (for example, the flowchart of FIG. 50) for specifying the region, the left-handed region, the indentation region),
It further comprises a changing means (for example, the flowchart of FIG. 52) capable of changing the threshold value or the threshold range used by the specifying means.

  According to the above configuration, by detecting the firing strength, it is possible to specify which region the player is trying to drive in the game medium.

(3-10) In the information management device according to any one of (3-1) to (3-9) above,
Between a central management device (for example, the central management device 1000 in FIG. 54) that can acquire the result of the aggregation processing from a plurality of information management devices (for example, the hall control 900 in FIG. 54) installed in a plurality of game halls, respectively. Communicable communication means (for example, S51 in FIG. 54);
Machine type display means (for example, S52 in FIG. 54) that can acquire the result of the totalization processing of the gaming machines installed in the game hall different from the game hall where the player is installed from the central management device and display them by model. And further comprising.

  According to the above configuration, since the result of counting the type of other game halls can be grasped at the own game hall, the game room of the other game hall is referred to, for example, the state of the nail adjustment. The state of the gaming machine can be adjusted.

(3-11) In the information management device according to any one of (3-1) to (3-10),
The acquisition means further acquires a changing signal that is output from the gaming machine and indicates that a plurality of pieces of identification information that can be identified are variably displayed (eg, S40 in FIG. 53).
A signal indicating that a game medium has passed through the first area or a game medium has passed through the second area from the time when the firing intensity starts to increase from substantially zero while not receiving the changing signal. It further includes measuring means (for example, S42, S44, and S45 in FIG. 53) that measures the time until a signal indicating that the signal is received.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp how long the game medium passes through the first area or the second area (for example, a pachinko ball wins a winning opening) after the player starts playing. .

(4-1) A gaming machine (P unit 2, S unit 2S) in which a game is played by a player,
Frames (outer frame 4 and front frame 5, main body frame 2aS);
A front member (glass door 6, front door 2bS) provided on the frame so as to be opened and closed;
Detecting means for detecting the opening of the front member (glass door opening detection switch 12, front frame opening detection switch 13, front door opening detection switch);
A board (game board 26, board mounting board) detachably provided on the frame;
Panel connection detection means (a convex drawer connector 32, a concave drawer connector 33) for detecting electrical connection between the panel and the frame;
The panel connection detection means and the open detection means are connected in series, and a power line (loop-shaped power line 500) wired in a loop shape that supplies power from a backup power source during a power-off period, which is a period during which the power is off. )When,
It is operated by the backup power source during the power-off period and counts the number of detections of opening of the front member by the opening detection means and the number of detections of electrical disconnection between the panel and the frame by the panel connection detection means. Counting means (counting counter 120 including CPU 10a operated by the backup power source of FIG. 37);
Output means (I / O port 10d) for outputting a count value in the power-off period in the counting means as a counting result;
The counting means is a circulation type counting means (FIG. 40 (c)) for counting from the initial value again after counting up to a predetermined upper limit value.
When the count value returns to the count value at the start time of the power-off by the counting process in the power-off period, the output means outputs a specific value indicating that as the count result (FIG. 36). A value (= 63) in which the round flag shown in (b) is set is output).

  According to such a configuration, not only the opening of the front member can be detected, but also the electrical connection between the panel and the frame can be detected. After counting up to a predetermined upper limit value, counting from the initial value is performed again. By counting the number of detections of opening of the front member by the circulation type counting means and the number of times of detecting electrical disconnection between the board and the frame by the board connection detecting means, the storage area of the count value of the number of detection times is excessive. It can be suppressed so that it does not become. In addition, when the count value returns to the count value at the start point of the power-off by the counting process in the power-off period, a specific value indicating that is output as the count result. The inconvenience that the numerical value goes around and the number of detection times is determined to be 0 can also be prevented. Also, even if an opening operation and a cutting operation are performed in which the counting range of the circulating counting means leaks and the count value of the counting means is intentionally made to circulate in accordance with the counting range, the determination of the opening is made accurately. Can be done.

(4-2) In the gaming machine of (4-1) above,
The power line (power line 500) is included in a wiring in a signal cable (for example, the signal cable 36 shown in FIG. 3) that transmits and receives signals between the frame and the panel.

  According to such a configuration, when removing the frame from the board, it is necessary to remove the signal cable including the power line, so that electrical disconnection between the board and the frame can be detected without fail.

(4-3) In the gaming machine of (4-2) above,
The panel connection detection means is the frame for connecting the signal cable and a floating connector (convex drawer connector 32, concave drawer connector 33) provided directly on the panel.

  According to such a configuration, when removing the frame from the board, it is necessary to remove the signal cable including the power line, so that electrical disconnection between the board and the frame can be detected without fail. Furthermore, when the board is attached to the frame, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the frame and the floating connector provided directly on the board.

(4-4) In any one of the above gaming machines (4-1) to (4-3),
Of the two sides of the board, main control means for controlling the gaming state is provided on the side opposite to the side facing the front member,
The main control means (main control board 16, main control unit 161) can be detached from the board by removing the board from the frame.

  According to such a configuration, when removing the main control means from the board, it is necessary to remove the board from the frame. Therefore, the operation of removing the main control means from the board can be detected by the board connection detecting means.

(4-5) In the gaming machine (4-4) above,
The power line further connects in series a main control connection detecting means (a connecting portion between the power line 500 of the game board 26 and the power line 500a of the main control board 16) for detecting an electrical connection between the board and the main control means. (For example, the power line 500a of the main control means is configured as a part of the loop-shaped power line 500).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily detect that the main control means has been removed from the board by disconnecting the wiring constituting the power line when removing the main control means from the board.

(4-6) In any one of the above gaming machines (4-1) to (4-5),
The frame is provided with payout control means (payout control board 17, payout control unit 171) for controlling the payout of game media,
The power line further connects in series with a payout control connection detecting means (connection portion between the board and the payout control means) for detecting an electrical connection between the board and the payout control means (for example, within the payout control means). A loop-shaped power line 500 is wired).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily detect that the payout control means has been removed from the board by cutting the wiring constituting the power line when removing the payout control means from the board.

(4-7) In any one of the gaming machines (4-1) to (4-6) above,
The counting means counts the number of detections of opening of the front member by the detecting means during a period in which the power source other than the power off period is on (FIG. 40 (c)),
A first storage area (9 to 14 in the image in RAM of FIG. 39) in which the current count value by the counting means is stored, and the stored value is not initialized by an external operation;
A second storage area (3 to 8 in the image in RAM of FIG. 39) for storing a count value at the time when the power-off is started by the counting means;
The output means includes
When the count value does not return to the count value at the time when the power is turned off, the difference value between the first storage area and the second storage area is output as the count result (difference values 000000 to 111110 in FIG. 39 are output). Output),
When the count value returns to the count value at the time of starting the power-off, a value outside the range that the difference value can take is output as the specific value (111111 in FIG. 39 is output).

  According to such a configuration, when the count value does not return to the count value at the start time of power-off, the count value at the present time by the circulation type counting means and the count value at the start time of power-off by the circulation type counting means. Since the difference value from the numerical value is output as the counting result, the number of detections of opening of the front member during the power-off period and the number of detections of electrical disconnection between the panel and the frame by the panel connection detecting means are counted. It is output as a result and can be grasped. On the other hand, when the count value returns to the count value at the time when the power is turned off, a value other than the range that can be taken by the difference value is output as a specific value, so that the difference value of the output value can be taken. By judging whether or not the specific value is out of the range, it is possible to grasp that the count value of the circulation type counting means has made a full round, and it is possible to accurately detect the opening and the disconnection.

(4-8) In the gaming machine of (4-7) above,
The stored value in the second storage area is stored in the first storage area when the power is turned off, and the stored value in the first storage area is initialized when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in S6 shown in FIG. 40). Further, before clearing the stored value to 0, the stored value may be overwritten and saved to the current value, and then the stored value may be cleared to 0).

  According to such a configuration, the storage value of the second storage area that stores the count value at the start of power-off is stored in the first storage area, and the storage value of the first storage area satisfies the predetermined condition. Since it is initialized on the basis of this, it is possible to prevent leakage of information such as a count range related to the count value of the circulation type counting means by keeping the stored value in the first storage area as much as possible.

(4-9) In any one of the above gaming machines (4-1) to (4-8),
The front member is pivotally supported at one end (FIG. 2),
The detection means is provided on the free end side of the front member opposite to the pivotally supported side (FIG. 2).

  According to such a configuration, the circulation type counting means is provided on the free end side of the front member opposite to the shaft-supported side. It can be detected at the end side, and the detection accuracy of the opening of the front member can be increased.

(4-10) In the gaming machine of (4-1) above,
Control means (dispensing control board 17) for performing control different from control for detecting and counting the opening of the front member is further provided,
The output means outputs a counting result to the control means when power is turned on (YES in S4 shown in FIG. 40 and output to the payout control board 17 in S5),
The control means outputs a signal indicating an abnormal state to the outside of the gaming machine when receiving the specific value (the value (= 63) where the round flag is raised) as the counting result (S14 shown in FIG. 41).

  According to such a configuration, when the power is turned on, the counting result is output to the control means, and when the control means receives the specific value as the counting result, a signal indicating an abnormal state is output to the outside of the gaming machine. In addition, fraud countermeasures can be strengthened.

(5-1) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming device is:
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (additional serial number: one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, and the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 10, 11, and 29) , See FIG. 30),
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, a request is made if the update information included in the received message matches the information obtained by updating the update information transmitted in the operation request message with predetermined information. A message determination unit that determines that the request is accepted, and determines that the request is not accepted if it does not match (FIG. 29: request accepted if the request serial number is m + 2, and request reject if m + 1),
The gaming machine is
When the operation request message is received, a response message transmitting means for transmitting an acceptance message if the request is accepted, and transmitting a rejection message if the request is rejected (FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 29, FIG. 30)
The response message transmission means includes:
Information obtained by updating the update information contained in the operation request message and transmitted with predetermined information is transmitted as update information of the consent message (FIG. 29: If request is accepted, m + 2 is transmitted, M + 1 is sent if the request is rejected)
The update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the reject message without updating with the predetermined information (see FIGS. 10, 11, 29, and 30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It is possible to determine whether the request message is an acceptance message or a rejection message.

(5-2) The present invention is a game control device (CU3 (or CU control unit in CU3)) for enabling a game on a gaming machine (P stand 2, S stand 2S),
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (additional serial number: one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, and the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 10, 11, and 29) , See FIG. 30),
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, a request is made if the update information included in the received message matches the information obtained by updating the update information transmitted in the operation request message with predetermined information. A message determination means for determining that the request is approved and determining that the request is not approved in the case of disagreement (FIG. 29: request approval if the request serial number is m + 2 and request reject if m + 1) is included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It is possible to determine whether the request message is an acceptance message or a rejection message.

(5-3) The present invention is a game control device (P stand 2, S stand 2S (or security chip in CU 3)) for enabling a game,
When an operation request message requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is received (a game ball addition request ON state information request), an approval message is transmitted if the request is accepted, In the case of refusing a request, it includes response message transmission means (see FIGS. 10, 11, 29, and 30) for transmitting a rejection message,
The response message transmission means includes:
Information obtained by updating the update information contained in the operation request message and transmitted with predetermined information (+1) is transmitted as update information of the consent message (for example, in FIG. 29, the received m + 1 Reply m + 2 to the additional serial number)
The update information included and transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the reject message without updating with predetermined information (see FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information to be included in the response message to the operation request message, but also to return the message that has been returned. It is possible to determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message for the operation request message.

(5-4) In the game system of (5-1) or the game control device of (5-2),
When transmitting the operation request message, the message transmission means transmits information obtained by updating the update information included in the message received immediately before with the predetermined information as update information of the transmission message, and other than the operation request message Is transmitted as update information of the transmitted message (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

  According to such a configuration, the communication partner determines that it is an operation request message if the received update information is obtained by updating the update information included in the message transmitted immediately before with the predetermined information. it can.

  (5-5) The gaming system according to (5-1) or (5-4) above, wherein the message transmission unit and the response message transmission unit are capable of specifying a transmission order of messages. (Normal serial number) is included in each message separately from the update information and transmitted (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the arrival of a message other than the communication related to the operation request message.

  (5-6) In the gaming system according to (5-5), the message transmission unit and the response message transmission unit update the update information and transmit the message when the update information is transmitted. It is not updated (see FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the update of the transmission order information as compared with the case where the transmission order information is updated even when the update information is updated and a message is transmitted.

(5-7) The gaming system according to any one of (5-1) (5-4) to (5-6), wherein the message determination unit includes:
When a message is received after the operation request message is transmitted, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined that the request is rejected (FIGS. 29 and 30). reference),
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, the update information included in the received message does not match the information obtained by updating the update information transmitted in the operation request message with the predetermined information, If the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted does not match, it is determined that the operation request message has not been reached (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

(5-8) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming device is:
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (additional serial number: one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, or the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 10, 11, 25) , FIG. 29 and FIG. 30),
When the message is received after the operation request message is transmitted, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined that the request is accepted. If there is a mismatch, a message determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 25: If the added serial number is m + 1, the request is accepted; if m, the request is rejected; Acceptance, if m + 1, the request is rejected)
The gaming machine is
When the operation request message is received, a response message transmitting means for transmitting an acceptance message if the request is accepted and transmitting a rejection message if the request is rejected (FIGS. 10, 11, 25, and 25). 29, see FIG. 30)
The response message transmission means includes:
Update information included in the operation request message and transmitted in a predetermined relationship is transmitted as update information of the acceptance message (FIG. 25: If the request is accepted, m + 1 is transmitted, and the request is rejected. M is transmitted if the request is accepted, m + 2 is transmitted if the request is accepted, and m + 1 is transmitted if the request is rejected).
Information having a predetermined relationship with the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted is transmitted as update information of the reject message (see FIGS. 10, 11, 25, 29, and 30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It is possible to determine whether the request message is an acceptance message or a rejection message.

(5-9) The present invention is a game control device (CU3 (or CU control unit in CU3)) for enabling a game on a gaming machine (P stand 2, S stand 2S),
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (additional serial number: one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, or the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) (FIGS. 10, 11, 25) , FIG. 29 and FIG. 30),
When the message is received after the operation request message is transmitted, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined that the request is accepted. If there is a mismatch, a message determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 25: If the added serial number is m + 1, the request is accepted; if m, the request is rejected; FIG. 29: If the request serial number is m + 2, the request is requested. Acceptance, if m + 1, the request is rejected).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It is possible to determine whether the request message is an acceptance message or a rejection message.

(5-10) The present invention is a game control device (P stand 2, S stand 2S (or security chip in CU 3)) for enabling a game,
When an operation request message requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is received (a game ball addition request ON state information request), an approval message is transmitted if the request is accepted, In the case of refusing a request, it includes response message transmission means (see FIGS. 10, 11, 25, 29, and 30) for transmitting a rejection message.
The response message transmission means includes:
Update information included in the operation request message and transmitted in a predetermined relationship is transmitted as update information of the acceptance message (for example, FIG. 25: m + 1 is added to the received m + 1 addition serial number). Reply, in FIG. 29, m + 2 is replied to the added serial number of m + 1 received)
Information having a predetermined relationship with the update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the reject message (see FIGS. 25 and 29).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information to be included in the response message to the operation request message, but also to return the message that has been returned. It is possible to determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message for the operation request message.

(5-11) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming machine (P 2 and S 2S) and a gaming device (CU3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming device is:
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (additional serial number: one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, and the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) See)
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined as request acceptance, and in the case of a mismatch A message determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 25: request approval if the addition serial number is m + 1, and request rejection if m is added),
The gaming machine is
When the operation request message is received, a response message transmission means for transmitting an acceptance message if the request is accepted and transmitting a rejection message if the request is rejected (see FIGS. 10, 11, and 25). Including
The response message transmission means includes:
Update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the acceptance message (FIG. 25: m + 1 is transmitted if the request is accepted, m is transmitted if the request is rejected),
The previous update information of the update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the reject message (see FIGS. 10, 11, 25, 29, and 30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It is possible to determine whether the request message is an acceptance message or a rejection message.

(5-12) The present invention is a game control device (CU3 (or CU control unit in CU3)) for enabling a game on a gaming machine (P stand 2, S stand 2S),
Update information that differs depending on whether an operation request message (a game ball addition request ON state information request) requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is transmitted or a message other than the operation request message is transmitted A message transmission means for transmitting a message including (additional serial number: one added to the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is ON, and the original addition serial number when the game ball addition request is OFF) See)
When a message is received after transmission of the operation request message, if the update information included in the received message matches the update information included in the operation request message and transmitted, it is determined as request acceptance, and in the case of a mismatch A message determination means for determining that the request is not approved (FIG. 25: If the additional serial number is m + 1, the request is approved, and if m, the request is rejected).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information of the message received after the operation request message has been transmitted, but the returned message is operated. It is possible to determine whether the request message is an acceptance message or a rejection message.

(5-13) The present invention is a game control device (P stand 2, S stand 2S (or security chip in CU 3)) for enabling a game,
When an operation request message requesting a predetermined operation (game ball addition operation) by the gaming machine is received (a game ball addition request ON state information request), an approval message is transmitted if the request is accepted, In the case of refusing a request, it includes response message transmission means (FIGS. 10, 11, and 25) for transmitting a rejection message,
The response message transmission means includes:
The update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as the update information of the acceptance message (for example, FIG. 25: m + 1 is returned to the added m + 1 serial number received),
The previous update information of the update information transmitted in the operation request message is transmitted as update information of the reject message (see FIG. 25).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operation request message has arrived by referring to the update information to be included in the response message to the operation request message, but also to return the message that has been returned. It is possible to determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message for the operation request message.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine not only whether the request is accepted based on the update information, but also whether the request is rejected or whether the operation request message has not arrived in the first place.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows a mode before the game board is attached to a front frame, and after being attached. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection and the response of a status information response has not reached | attained from a pachinko machine to a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not arrived. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not arrived. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the count request | requirement from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows another example of a process when there exists a power failure and a communication line disconnection, and the response of the count response from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P platform and CU regarding an addition serial number. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of P stand and CU regarding a count serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 1st and 2nd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a 3rd check process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the operation | movement regarding a request serial number. It is the schematic which shows the game system which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the transmission process of the business end information which the hall | hole server which concerns on this embodiment performs. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the alerting | reporting process of the business completion which the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment performs. It is the schematic which shows the system for games concerning the modification 1. It is the schematic which shows the system for games concerning the modification 2. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of a count counter. It is a block diagram for demonstrating opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage state of the data memorize | stored in RAM, and the state from which a data signal is output according to the input of CS signal and CLK signal. It is a flowchart which shows the control operation of CPU of a count counter. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of the count display process by a payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of the correction | amendment process of discharge intensity. It is the figure which illustrated the relationship between the change of the firing intensity T, and a total interruption period. It is the figure (the 1) which illustrated the contents of total data obtained by the result of total processing. It is the figure (the 2) which illustrated the contents of the total data obtained as a result of total processing. It is the figure (the 3) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is the figure (the 4) which illustrated the content of the total data obtained by the result of a total process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a firing abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a driving | running | working area specific process. It is the figure which illustrated correspondence with a driving field and a firing intensity threshold range. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed procedure of a threshold range setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a measurement process. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the system containing a hall control and a central management apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a summary tabulation process. It is the figure which illustrated the contents of summary tabulation data. It is the figure which illustrated the data memorize | stored in the internal memory of Hallcon by threshold range memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a model classification display process. It is the figure which illustrated model type data typically. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Embodiments according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2 is attached. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2 at a side position on the predetermined side of the P table 2. Yes.

  The P stand 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 (see FIG. 4) is driven to make one shot of the enclosing ball. The game board 26 is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27 in front of the game board 26. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. Is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The firing strength of the pachinko ball (hereinafter simply referred to as the firing strength T) can be adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting ball operating handle 25 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the handle operating amount), and the handle operating amount is increased. The firing intensity T increases accordingly. Therefore, the player can adjust the firing strength T so that the pachinko ball passes through the region he / she aims by adjusting the handle operation amount.

  The P stand 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 includes a variable display unit that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (symbols). Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  A probable winning prize opening 271 a is arranged in the big winning prize opening 271. When the pachinko ball that has won the big prize opening 271 also wins the probability change prize opening 271a, the probability that a big hit will occur after the end of the current big hit state is improved (hereinafter also referred to as a probability variation state or simply a probability change state). Will occur.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278 becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (a slotted pattern), so that the probability variation big hit state And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won in any of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening 154 without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  An indicator 54 is provided at a position below the game area 27 in the P stand 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the display of the points, the remaining card amount, or the variable display device 278 to the player. The display 54 is formed integrally with the CU (card unit) 3 even if it is attached to the P base (pachinko machine) 2 independently of the CU (card unit) 3 as shown in FIG. (Pachinko machine) 2 may be configured to be fitted on the front surface. If the display 54 of the CU 3 is configured to be fitted to the front surface of the P base 2, the CU 3 and the P base 2 can be more strongly connected, so that fraud can be further prevented. In this case, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the display 54 from being released unless the glass door 6 or the lower door provided with the hitting ball operating handle 25 is opened. .

  A 7-segment display 50 is provided below the display 54. The 7-segment display 50 includes a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171 described later. The 7-segment display 50 displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like.

  Further, a counting button 28 for counting from game balls to holding balls is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25 on the P platform 2. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28 is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or the counting button 28 is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time). Further, the counting speed is further improved when a card return operation is performed, and a smooth card return process is realized.

  As described above, since the counting button 28 is provided on the P base (pachinko machine) 2 side, it is seated facing the P base 2 as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the CU (card unit) 3 side. Can improve the operability of the player. In addition, the P platform 2 is provided with speakers 270 for outputting music data to be reproduced in accordance with the effects displayed on the variable display device 278 at the upper right position and the upper left position of the game area 27. In addition, the position and the number of speakers are not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 1, and the position and the number may be changed as necessary.

  A game ball number display 29 for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28. The game ball number display 29 is a 7-segment display. The game ball number display 29 may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  The P stand 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26 and other game frames (front frames) 5. In particular, the game board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5 is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board 26 when replacing a new stand.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU 3 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to general players who have not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU 3 that accepts these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the data of the game balls is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of CU3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display unit 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card when the member card is received (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID). ) And a replay button 319 for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the member card ID.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card) (also referred to as the card balance or simply the balance), but can display the number of game balls and various other information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the P stand 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. Separately from the replay button 319, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319 may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801 in association with the card number. When the hall server 801 stores the card number in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801 may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding balls in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored at regular intervals every time the counting button 28 is operated and counting processing is performed, for example. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from CU3, the possession ball stored in CU3 is temporarily stored in the hall server 801 as a stored ball, and the day when the player receives the card return When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3 again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321, and a card return button 322 are further provided on the front side of the CU 3. The IR photosensitive unit 320 is an IR photosensitive unit 320 that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by an attendant at a game arcade, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it for a game by the P stand 2. The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion−the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 2, the P base 2 is opened and closed with respect to the frame-like outer frame 4 by a front frame (hereinafter also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 with the left side edge as a swing center. It is provided as possible.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the center of swing (the free end side). The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. When the front frame 5 in the open state is pressed against the outer frame 4, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  Then, a clerk at the game hall inserts a key into the key hole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, clockwise rotation), thereby a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a against the urging force of the spring, 6b is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the glass door 6 portion facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement protrusion 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 by pressing the opened glass door 6 against the front frame 5. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are engaged with each other to be locked. In this state, a game attendant inserts a key into the keyhole 10 shown in FIG. 1 and performs an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation), whereby the engaging protrusion 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring. Then, the engagement between the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 is released, and the lock door is released, and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame open detection switch 13 is provided at a position in contact with the outer frame 4 in a lower part of the front frame 5 and it is detected that the front frame 5 is opened. Further, a glass door open detection switch 12 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6 in the upper part of the front frame 5, and the glass door open detection switch 12 detects that the glass door 6 has been opened.

  The number of opening times of the glass door opening detection switch 12 and the front frame opening detection switch 13 is counted by a counting counter 120 shown in FIG. The counting counter 120 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power source even when the power supply of the P stand 2 is interrupted, and detection of opening of the glass door 6 and the front frame 5 even when the power is turned off at night or the like. The count can be counted and the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P base 2.

  A main control board 16 is provided on the back surface of the game board 26 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the glass door 6). Since the back surface of the outer frame 4 is closed, the main control board 16 becomes detachable from the game board 26 by first opening the front frame 5 and removing the game board 26 from the front frame 5. That is, in order to remove the main control board 16 from the game board 26 or replace the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16, it is necessary to open the front frame 5. The work can be detected without fail. Therefore, if the main control board 16 is illegally removed from the game board 26 or the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16 is illegally exchanged, the front frame opening detection switch 13 can always detect.

  Further, a payout control board 17 is provided on the back surface of the front frame 5. The payout control board 17 also needs to be removed from the back surface of the front frame 5 after first opening the front frame 5. Therefore, if the dispensing control board 17 is illegally removed from the back surface of the front frame 5 or the semiconductor chip provided on the dispensing control board 17 is illegally replaced, the front frame opening detection switch 13 can always detect.

  Next, the structure which installs the game board 26 in the front frame 5 is demonstrated. FIG. 3 is a view showing the game board 26 before and after being attached to the front frame 5. As shown in FIG. 3, attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b are provided on the back surface of the front frame 5 so as to be openable and closable around hinges 35a and 35b, respectively. The attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b have a U-shaped shape and have a bottom having a width corresponding to the game board 26. By pushing the game board 26 into the front frame 5 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 3B, the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b as shown in FIG. 3A. When the game board 26 is fixed by the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26 side is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33 provided on the front frame 5 side. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are floating connectors having flexibility with respect to displacement.

  Further, when the game board 26 is installed in the front frame 5, the convex drawer connector 32 is coupled to the concave drawer connector 33, so that the main control board 16 on the game board 26 side and the payout control board on the front frame 5 side are combined. 17 is connected. Further, the game board 26 is fixed at a fixed position, and the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 have flexibility with respect to a certain degree of positional deviation, so the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer These can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship with the connector 33. In addition, even if it is the structure which installs the game board 26 in the front frame 5 only by the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33, without providing the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b, the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are provided. Since they are flexible connectors themselves, they can be coupled without being aware of the positional relationship between the game board 26 and the front frame 5. Here, the convex drawer connector 32 is connected to the main control board 16 via an internal wiring (not shown) of the game board 26, and the concave drawer connector 33 is a payout shown in FIG. 2 via the signal cable 36. It is connected to the control board 17.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the CU 3 and the P stand 2. With reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the control circuit of CU3 and P stand 2 is demonstrated.

  The CU 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323 is a main control function unit of the CU 3, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 5) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323 is a security board (SC board) 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 of the P table 2 while ensuring security. The security board 325 is a security monitoring function unit of the CU3. Note that the CU control unit 323 may be provided on the security board 325, or the CU control unit 323 may be provided on a board different from the security board 325. The CU 3 is provided with a connecting portion (not shown) to the P stand 2 side, and the P stand 2 is provided with a connecting portion (not shown) to the CU 3 side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325 on the CU 3 side and the payout control board 17 on the P stand 2 side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the P base 2. The SC 325b further includes a fraud detection unit 1325. The fraud detection unit 1325 performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323 to the P-unit 2, and manages the key when fraud is detected. The server 800 (see FIG. 5) is notified. Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by an attendant at the game hall, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded in the inserted card into the CU control unit 323, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323. The CU control unit 323 writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323 stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is transmitted to the P base 2. The display data transmitted to the P platform 2 is input to the display 312 via the relay board 14. The display 312 displays an image corresponding to the display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The ball lending button 321 is not limited to the configuration provided in the CU 3, and may be configured so as to be provided in the P platform 2 and input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the card return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  The P base 2 has a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2, a payout control board 17 that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the launch motor 18 based on commands from the payout control board 17 A launch control board 31, a variable display device 278, and an effect control board 15 that controls the display of the variable display device 278 based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16.

  The main control board 16 and the effect control board 15 are provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer as the main control unit 161. The main control unit 161 is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a CPU work area. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162 and a radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26.

  When a ball wins each start winning opening 275, 276, 277, the main control unit 161 draws a random number for determining a big hit (or further including a small hit) / off and stores the random number. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, 4. When the variable display device 278 is ready to start a new variable display, the main control unit 161 digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161 transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151 mounted on the effect control board 15 as commands.

  The variable display command transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / out), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161 to the production control unit 151 include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and the occurrence of an error in the gaming state. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151 determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278 based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161. For example, the effect control unit 151 specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151 controls display of the variable display device 278 according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15 is also connected to the display 54 via the relay board 14 on the front frame 5 side. The effect control unit 151 transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278 and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278 to the display unit 54. Is possible. The relay board 14 and the display 54 may be provided on the CU3 side. In this case, the effect control board 15 on the P stand 2 side is connected to the relay board 14 provided in the CU 3.

  The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 6 (game frame). The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  Further, a firing ball detection switch 903, an out ball detection switch 701, a foul ball detection switch 33A, a counting button 28, and a radio wave sensor 173 are provided on the payout control board 17 in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. The ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Accordingly, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173.

  From main control board 16 to payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbols determined, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the P base 2 and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P base 2 is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the dispensing control board 17 when the power of the table 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the power of the P unit 2 is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33A, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the fired ball detection signal is input updates the number of in-game balls by subtraction.

  The security board 325 of the CU 3 and the payout control board 17 of the P stand 2 are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325 to the payout control board 17 as described later. On the contrary, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325 as described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17, the front frame 6 (game frame) is provided with a relay board 14, a launch control board 31, a launch motor 18, and a game ball number display 29. The game ball number indicator 29 may be directly attached to the front frame 6, but it may be attached to the front frame 6 like an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko machine from which balls are paid out. You may make it provide in the aspect which can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54. The payout control unit 171 of the payout control board 17 displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18 of the launcher. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27. The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting ball operating handle 25 is input.

  The launch intensity sensor 19 detects the launch intensity T of the pachinko ball by the launch motor 18. For example, the firing intensity sensor 19 detects, as the firing intensity T, a value obtained by converting an analog value output from a variable resistor configured to change the electrical resistance value according to the handle operation amount into a digital value. Hereinafter, as an example, it is assumed that the firing strength T varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) according to the amount of steering operation. The detection result of the launch intensity sensor 19 is output to the payout control board 17 and the CU 3 via the launch control board 31.

  A display 54 is provided in the front frame 6 (game frame). The display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 via the relay board 14. Further, the display unit 54 receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15 via the relay board 14.

  The relay board 14 outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15 and the display control unit 350 to the display 54 and outputs the display control signal to the display 54 based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15 or the display control unit 350. A switching circuit 141 for displaying an image is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the display 54 on the P stand 2 side is configured to be controlled on the CU side. Instead, the display 54 is controlled on the P stand 2 side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54 based on a command from the payout control unit 171.

  The RAM clear switch 293 is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2, and after the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 4, the circulation route of the pachinko ball in the P stand 2 will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven. As a result, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The detection of the play of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is changed from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 4) on which the payout control unit 171 is provided. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27, the out balls that have entered the out port 154 (see FIG. 1) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701 provided in the middle. . The foul balls flow down through the foul ball return path and are detected by a foul ball detection switch 33A provided in the middle of the foul balls.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, the winning ball, the out ball, and the foul ball are all detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903 is a switch that detects all of the bullets that have been bulleted. When the number detected by the switch and the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18 become equal, it can be determined that all the pachinko balls that have been driven are collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of shots detected by the shot ball detection switch 903 and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference is not zero, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have not been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it can be determined whether the game area 27 is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification process when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 5, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security board 325, payout control unit 171, or main control board 16, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. For the abnormality mentioned here, the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, or malfunction or failure occurs due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 5 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU 3. is there. The key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325 of the CU 3, the CU control part 323 detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323 and the security board 325 described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325 is manufactured. Further, when the CU 3 is brought into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. The

  When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 controls the display 312 to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350 to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3, the security board 325 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal indicating that (an abnormality notification signal). In response, the payout control unit 171 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the CU control unit 323 is notified of this, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323, the security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 of the fact. When detecting an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 notifies the CU control unit 323 of the fact. The notification destination of abnormality occurrence by the security board 325 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. In addition, the security board 325 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325 notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 detects that fact and notifies the CU control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The CU control unit 323 performs the above-described abnormality notification control. The hall server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the main control board 16, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17 detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325, while notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16. It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325 described above, the payout control board 17 is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on each of the CU 3 side and the P stand 2 side and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 6, main data of various data stored on each of the CU (card unit) 3 side and the P stand (pachinko machine) 2 side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2 side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU 3 side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2 side. On the other hand, the CU3 side manages and stores the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of stored balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount).

  FIG. 6 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU 3 side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P base 2 side. First, when the power supply is started up in a state where the P unit (pachinko machine) 2 and the CU (card unit) 3 are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control board 17 on the P table 2 side. Receives the main chip ID (main control chip ID) from the main control board 16, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3 side, and also issues the payout chip ID (payout control) stored in the payout control board 17 itself. Chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3 side.

  On the CU3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time at which communication is started after the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P base 2 side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data is collated with the data already stored, and it is determined whether or not the same P base 2 is connected as in the previous time. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data in which communication between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side is started is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. Time data is stored on the P table 2 side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. “Normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission on the CU3 side (primary station side) with an initial value “1”. However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. P station 2 side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2 requests the CU 3 to count game balls.

  Only the CU3 has the right to update the normal serial number. When the normal serial number that is the same as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3 backs up and stores the normal serial number and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3 has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When the addition request is made, the CU 3 transmits an addition sequence number added to the addition sequence number that has been used for communication until then to the P unit 2. The P platform 2 returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P-unit 2 has the counting update number addition update right. When making a request for counting, the P platform 2 transmits to the CU 3 a counting sequence number that is +1 to the counting sequence number that has been used for communication. When CU3 accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, with regard to “normal serial number”, a configuration will be described in which the serial number received by the CU 3 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Each of the P base 2 and the CU 3 or the serial number received by the P base 2 at the time of transmission is counted up (+1), and the other is the received serial number. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 4) on the P table 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2 side to the CU 3 side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154, and the total number of balls of the out ball and the safe ball means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball that has been placed in the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an additional ball to which a gaming ball is added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting number of balls) from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  On the P-unit 2 side, each time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, the count values are stored in the previous gaming machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, the game table information transmitted to the CU 3 side immediately before is added to the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before). Stored as data. When the latest game machine information is not transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side, the backup data includes not only the value of each counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each counter of the previous time that was not transmitted. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU 3 side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3 side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls stored, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter transmitted from the P stand 2 side to update the number of balls. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2 side. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2, the number of card holding balls is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2 one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU 3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification lamp or indicator 312 is used to notify an error, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be performed by a computer or hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P unit 2 side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P-unit 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and the Pball 2 side are stored by the hall server 801 or the hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the CU 3 stores a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, a press input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 provided on the CU 3 when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Furthermore, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side. In response to this, the P stand 2 side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosed circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card possessions.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3 and the P base 2 according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the divided transmission of the message is not performed. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between CU (card unit) 3 and P stand (pachinko machine) 2 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 7 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 after the CU 3 completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the CU 3 transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “previous final transmission count serial number”, “store code”, and “SC board ID”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for requesting status information, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission sequence number” is the sequence number of the command for requesting the state information last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the time of the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the last final transmission serial number (serial number) when the status information response is received at the CU3 and when the status information response is received at the CU3. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2 and the CU 3 side when receiving the status information response to the CU 3 when the P unit 2 transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2 Is matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the number of game balls before counting is restored.

  The P platform 2 refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3, and if the CU 3 has not performed the counting process for the counting request, it is assumed that there is no counting request. In this case, the P stand 2 does not execute the game ball subtraction process corresponding to the counting request notified to the CU 3 itself. On the other hand, the P stand 2 refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3, and when the CU 3 determines that the counting process has been performed, the number of game balls is subtracted from the number of game balls before counting. Confirm. When all the store codes held by the P stand 2 are “0” or “1”, it is determined that the store codes match.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2 with respect to the CU 3. Recovery information includes “sequential number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “last inserted card ID”, “previous card insertion time”, “previous last transmission addition serial number”, “game information storage presence / absence”, “ “Previous Game Table Information” and “Previous Game Information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU 3.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  The “previous gaming machine information” is the gaming machine information previously notified to the CU 3, and includes “the number of gaming balls”, “the number of fired balls”, “the number of balls passing through the outlet”, “the total number of winning ball balls”, “the counting ball” It includes information on “number” and “counting serial number”. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 last time. “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls previously notified to CU3. The “out mouth passing ball count” is the number of out mouth passing balls notified to the CU 3 last time. The “total prize ball number” is the total prize ball number notified to the CU 3 last time. “Counting balls” is the number of counting balls notified to CU3 last time. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3, and includes information on “number of game information”, “type information 1” to “type information n”, “prize ball information 1” to “prize ball information n”. Is included. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Type information 1” is the game type information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Type information n” is the game type information n notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information n” is game prize ball information n notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number that is stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 when the state information request is received at the CU 3 and when the status information request is received at the P base 2.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P table 2, the “store code” and “SC substrate ID” notified from the security board 325, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P table 2 If the “store code” does not match, it is processed as no recovery data. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of game information, “no game information storage” is set to no storage: 0x00, and the recovery data held by the P table 2 is set in “previous gaming machine information” and “previous gaming information”. When there is no recovery information of game information or when the last transmission serial number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is not stored “0x00”, and “previous game machine information” and “previous game information” are set to ALL “0”. set. When all the store codes held by the P stand 2 are “0” or “1”, it is determined that the store codes match.

  In addition, when the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P table 2 is not performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. If the “last previous transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when recovery processing cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3 or the P unit 2), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P unit 2. For example, it is conceivable that the display information of the P base 2 is displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable that a display device controlled by the payout control unit 171 is further provided on the P table 2 and information for manual correction is displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the additional recovery information to the P unit 2 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “additional number of balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3 determines that it is necessary to perform the additional ball recovery process in the P stand 2. The CU 3 compares the “previous last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery response received from the P unit 2 with the “previous final transmission addition serial number” stored in the CU 3, and if they match, the additional ball recovery is performed. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection, and the “addition ball number” is the game ball This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P base 2 will be described in detail. The recovery process of the P unit 2 is based on the recovery request 2 and, if the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified from the CU 3 has not been performed, This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 is for notifying the CU 3 of the processing result of the added recovery information at the P unit 2 and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2 is in a state where the number of additional balls cannot be received, a process NG is returned as a recovery result.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This communication start request command requests the P base 2 to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response to the communication start response is a response to the CU 3 for communication start.

  The communication start request command notifies the P unit 2 that communication has started normally. Receiving the communication start request, the P base 2 clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3 sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2 also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response to the communication start response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3 clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2 to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This communication end response is a response to the end of communication to the CU3.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2 that the communication has ended normally, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3 that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stop the communication and wait for the restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes data of “sequential number”, “command”, “CU state”, “addition ball number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3 notified to the P base 2, and indicates that a card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and no card is inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state where a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing into a stock card (general 0 yen 0 card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of CU3.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the P unit 2 of the card unit opening state according to the state of CU3. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. Note that when the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 with a status information response as the number of all playing game balls being held.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of “preparing for card return” for a certain time (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P table 2 has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it has received a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3 by counting the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit4 notifies P stand 2 that the receipt has been completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response.

  When Bit 5 is “1”, card removal is waiting, and “0” indicates completion of card removal. Bit 5 notifies P stand 2 of the state of waiting for card removal from CU 3. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the status information response is to notify the information / status of the P platform 2 to the CU 3. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information response includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “game table state”, “injustice detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3 by using the “total prize ball number”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3 checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3 matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3. If the data is received without holding the card, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154 (when there are a plurality of balls that have passed during transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball number” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball number” transmitted from the CU 3. In addition, the CU 3 adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the data for the total number of winning balls is received without holding the card, CU3 does not add the number of gaming balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of cards held. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28 is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the number of counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

  The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2 when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P table 2, and the “gaming table state 1”, “gaming table state 2”, “ It includes information on “game table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. The game is in progress (a state in which the fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball and the game is in the state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operating handle 25) is touched (touch sensor touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to the fire stop switch (also called single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). Note that if the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after the ball launch is stopped, the P platform 2 times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3 and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. Bit 6 to Bit 7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit 3 indicates that the game state information is changing, and “1” is set during the change. Bit4 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code that is occurring in the P table 2, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When “0”, only an alert is issued, and when “1”, an alert + output to the hall server 801 is indicated.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and includes “fraud detection state 1” and “fraud detection state 2” , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko machine or a slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for nighttime frame opening / monitoring SW abnormality detection when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “fraud detection information 4” is data indicating nighttime frame opening information. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, there is no response when the continuity of the added serial number is not established.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit1 to Bit7 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. If they do not match, the game ball of another store is mixed with the game ball, and Bit0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to CU3.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P device 2, and “number of game information”, “type information 1” to “type information n”. ”,“ Prize ball information 1 ”to“ Prize ball information n ”.

  The “number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / prize ball information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is the winning opening, and “4” is the number of symbol stops. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. .

  “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. “Prize ball information 1” to “Prize ball information n” are game prize ball information 1 to game prize ball. Information n is shown.

  Here, the prize ball information is information on the number of prize balls from Bit0 to Bit3, and indicates the number of prize balls at the time of winning for each data type of game information. When "" to "15", the data of the number of award balls are respectively represented. Bits 4 to 7 are information on the number of winnings, and indicate the number of winnings (cumulative) for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, data on the winning number is displayed. Each represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is the detection result of the fire strength sensor 19 described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2 and the CU 3 is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278 changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning holes 275, 276, and 277.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card insertion response is a response indicating that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU3.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “card ID” is identification ID information of the IC card inserted into the CU 3 and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1) of CU3. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held by the P stand 2 is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3 is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3 has been moved to the store. The CU 3 stores a store code where the CU 3 is installed. The store code is added to the security board 325 and notified to the P units. “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying CU3, and is used to determine whether or not CU3 has been replaced. The SC board ID is notified by adding information from the security board 325 to the P board 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card return notification command notifies the P unit 2 of a card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to CU3.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2 of the card return, and the CU 3 transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3 and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card currently being inserted or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2 at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU 3 performs a membership card insertion, a general card insertion, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2 backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3 at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to CU3.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2 is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the P base 2 and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU 3 of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU 3 is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3 and is arbitrary data.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3 and the P base 2 will be described. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P station 2 (secondary station), and P station 2 returns a response to CU3 in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3 is the primary station and the P stand 2 is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P unit 2 from the CU 3 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P base 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the P platform 2 hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P platform 2. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3 side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2 again. Further, if a response cannot be received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Resend the same command to P-unit 2 up to 14 times. If the response is not received from the P-unit 2 even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3 determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication interruption”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 2 are disconnected, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2 is disconnected. CU3 does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2 side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. Thereafter, when the state in which the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2 determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18 and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector of CU3 and the connector of P base 2, disconnection of connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of CU3.

  It should be noted that the command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2 side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 8 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3 and the P platform 2 is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU 3 is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, communication is started after the firing motor 18 is stopped on the P stand 2 to stop the game. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2 and requests recovery information from the P unit 2. The P unit 2 refers to the previous last transmission count sequence number notified from the CU 3 and executes count recovery processing. Specifically, the P-unit 2 refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3 has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3 has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2 returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  When the CU3 that has received the recovery response has not executed the process of the last transmission addition serial number included in the recovery information, the CU3 performs the additional recovery process of the CU3 using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When the addition ball recovery process is performed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 to the P base 2 and transmits recovery data to the P base 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P platform 2 executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3 (recovery response 2). When the P stand 2 cannot receive the additional balls, the recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 and is not only executed at power-on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2 receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. The CU 3 transmits a command, and backs up the serial number when a response with the same serial number is notified from the P unit 2. When transmitting the response corresponding to the received command, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the received serial number as it is. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2 returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3 as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3 transmits the command of the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2 with the serial number “2”. The P base 2 returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3 as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number to “4”, and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2 returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P base 2, and the P base 2 sends the response of the status information response to the CU 3 with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3 shown in FIG. 9 transmits a command for status information request including the serial number = n and the card return ready state = OFF to the P unit 2 before the card is inserted. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n and the game prohibition to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, in CU3, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed.

  The CU 3 is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the middle of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the hall server 801 about the holding ball, storage ball, remaining card amount, etc. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312 and the display on the display 54 on the P platform 2 side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312, a status information request including serial number = n + 1, card return ready state = OFF Is sent to the P-unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU3. The display 54 on the P platform 2 side is controlled by the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 to display that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data in the RAM of the payout control unit 171 and a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3. Also in CU3, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2 to notify the P unit 2 of the card being inserted. . The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3, thereby indicating that the game is being permitted. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 4 and the card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 responds to the status information response including the serial number = n + 4 and the game permission. Is returned to CU3.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 10, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3 lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined by the CU 3 alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. During the addition display, the display unit 54 displays that 125 balls are withdrawn from the remaining amount and added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3 counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And since the P stand 2 notifies CU3 of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 5, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 11, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319 in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3 determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the possession balls or the storage balls is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation of depressing the possession ball payout button or the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3 notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2 after confirming the consumption from a ball or a storage ball. Specifically, CU3 displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and issues a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P-station 2. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” last time. Back up the data. And the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU3. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, CU3 transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = OFF and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, P unit 2 has serial number = n + 2, number of additional balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to CU3.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 12 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, the card return ready state bits transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 are all OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Further, in FIG. 12, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of gaming balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  In response to the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P unit 2. The same counting sequence number m is returned from the P base 2 to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28. In FIG. 12, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28 once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3. It has been transmitted to the P stand 2.

  When the operation of the counting button 28 is detected, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response of the serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. The display controller 350 receives the command and controls the display 54 on the P platform 2 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request of serial number n + 2, counting serial number m + 1, and counting response = ON to the P base 2 to notify that the requested counting has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display on the game ball number display 29 from 800 to 700. At this stage, the count request state of the P base 2 is OFF, but since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2 transmits a second count request to the CU 3. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3. However, even at this stage, the P base 2 does not perform counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3 which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls, and updates the display of balls to 200. Further, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3 transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2 to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2 that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29 from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P platform 2 notifies the CU 3 of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to CU3. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  The CU 3 that has received this status information response determines that the counting is complete. Although not shown, the CU 3 transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return ready state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 13, the number of card possessions specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of game balls is 800. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, at the time when the player presses the “card return” button, the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is 800 balls, and the CU 3 determines that the number of game balls in the P unit 2 is not 0. In addition, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU 3 sets the card return ready state = ON, the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2 is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3 displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54 or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28 to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2 determines that the counting operation for depressing the counting button 28 is a counting operation with the card return preparation state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU 3 of the counting ball number 800 balls obtained by collectively counting the 800 ball balls, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 1, a game ball number = 800, and a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3. However, at this stage, the P base 2 does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a count request message, the P platform 2 counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, CU3 adds 800 counting balls to the number of holding balls, and subtracts 800 counting balls from 800 gaming balls to 0. Further, the CU 3 backs up the data of the updated last transmission count sequence number. Then, in order to notify receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU opening state = ON, card return preparation state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3, the P stand 2 subtracts 800 counting balls from the 800 gaming balls and displays 0 gaming balls on the display 54 or the like. Further, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 that the number of game balls is 0 and the counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to CU3. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to CU3 without counting up.

  CU3 counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28 and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3, the card ID and the card insertion time data held on the payout control board 17 are cleared.

  In response, the CU 3 determines whether the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P-unit 2 match, and if they match, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801 or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3 stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 and returns the card to the player. Further, when the player has started the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in CU3 Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3 can be extracted from the card insertion / discharge port 309, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309 (card extraction possible state). The CU 3 is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  Then, when the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3 notifies the P unit 2 of information indicating that the card return preparation state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3 sends a command for status information request including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2 Send. In response to this, the P stand 2 displays a message “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278 to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the card. Further, in order to notify the card removal, the P platform 2 may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” from the speaker 270. Further, the P stand 2 transmits a command of a status information response including the serial number = n + 4, the number of game balls = 0, the counting serial number = m + 1, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting response = OFF to the CU3.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309 is in the ON state, the CU 3 transmits a command for a status information request including “Waiting for card removal = ON” to the P unit 2. However, when the player pulls out the card from the card insertion / discharge slot 309, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is turned off, so that CU3 is waiting for card number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the state information including is transmitted to the P unit 2.

  In response to this, the P platform 2 stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278 and ends the notification of the card removal. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Furthermore, the P platform 2 transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3.

  Note that the sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 13 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal Sequence 1 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. In particular, FIG. 14 shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information request has not arrived (from the CU 3 to the P base 2). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 14, CU 3 transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2 before the power interruption occurs during the game. In response to this, in order to notify the gaming machine information CU3, the P machine 2 transmits a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU3. . The P table 2 updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3 receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2 during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, the P stand 2 is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. Thereafter, since the status information response from the P stand 2 is not transmitted, the CU 3 performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2 transmits the response of the status information response to the CU 3 until the power interruption occurs, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed. The number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P stand 2 is restored and the P stand 2 starts to operate. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the last status information response sent from the P-unit 2 to the CU3 before the communication interruption has reached the CU3. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU 3 side based on the game information to be played. Therefore, in this case, the P stand 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) to the CU 3 as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game stand information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 before the CU 3 has not reached the CU 3, in this case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game stand information) A recovery response (sequence number = 1) including game information is returned to CU3. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  In FIG. 14, CU3 does not perform the addition recovery process because there is no game information stored in the recovery response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since there is no game information storage, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P base 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. In response to the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 2 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information response has not yet reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. FIG. 15 particularly shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of P stand 2 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not reached (from P stand 2 to CU 3 FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 15, after a power failure occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. At that time, the number of balls currently held is stored in the card and discharged. If the number of possessed balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU or the like, the hall server 801 periodically receives the number of retained balls from the CU 3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stores it in a backup manner. The loss may be compensated for by the player based on the stored data (the number of balls). Thereafter, the power-off of the CU 3 is restored, and the CU 3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the previous last transmission serial number = n−1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P unit 2 compares and determines the previous last transmission sequence number = n−1 of the received recovery request and the last final transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). . As a result, since they do not match, it is determined that the state information response transmitted last before the occurrence of the power interruption has not reached CU3. Therefore, the P stand 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the game information storage presence (specifically, the previous game stand information presence) to the CU 3 as having unreported game information to the CU 3. To do. That is, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, which are the previous game table information, are included in the recovery response and transmitted to the CU3. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU 3 executes the recovery process based on the game information included in the recovery response. However, since the game ball addition request is not transmitted immediately before the communication line disconnection is detected, the addition recovery process is unnecessary. For this reason, after receiving the recovery response, the communication start request is transmitted without transmitting the recovery request 2. The CU 3 executes a first check process before transmitting this communication start request. In the first check process, whether or not the number of game balls included in the game machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response by the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response is an appropriate value Is checked. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, in the P-unit 2, the unreported game table information (the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls) included in the state information response that did not reach the CU 3 before the power failure = 36) is notified to the CU 3 by a status information response, and the last transmission serial number is updated last time to back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. In response to the status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 updates the previous last transmission serial number and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the card ID of the reinserted card is properly read by the card information reading process, whether the read card ID matches the card ID included in the recovery response or not Is determined by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3, and the insertion time of the card inserted at the start of the game before the power interruption occurs is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323, and the stored card insertion time and recovery are stored. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 may determine whether or not the card insertion times included in the response match. In this case, it is determined that both match, and if there is no addition recovery, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  In this embodiment, a card ID and a card insertion time are used as player specifying information that can specify a player when determining the identity of the player. This card ID includes not only the card ID of the member card that identifies the individual player of the member but also the card ID of the visitor card used by the player who visited the store as a visitor. In the case of this visitor card, it is used for an unspecified player and does not specify a specific player individual. That is, in the case of this card ID, whether the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line disconnection and the player who intends to play the game after the power interruption is restored are the same player. It can be specified whether or not, but it cannot be specified to which specific individual the player is. Therefore, the above “player identification information” is not limited to identifying a specific individual player, and the player who played the game before the occurrence of the power interruption / communication line interruption and the game after the power interruption recovery is performed. It is a broad concept that includes information that can be used to determine the identity of the player who is trying to correct.

<< Abnormal sequence 3 >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, another recovery process of the number of game balls when the status information response is unreached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. In particular, FIG. 16 shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of CU3 is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information response has not reached (a command is sent from P unit 2 to CU3). It is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process in the case where the communication partner after recovery is unmatched. This power OFF / ON can also be turned OFF / ON, for example, by failure of the CU3, manually turning the power OFF / ON, or by inserting / removing the CU3 from / from the card unit holder.

  Referring to FIG. 16, after a power interruption occurs during a game, a status information response including serial number = n, number of game balls = 480, number of additional balls = 3 and number of subtracted balls = 23 is sent from P unit 2 to CU. When transmitted, the CU cannot receive the status information response because the CU is in a power-off state. After that, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18. During this 3 seconds, the game is continued in the P table 2 and the game table information is changed, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6, and the number of subtraction balls = 36, which becomes the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  On the other hand, CU3 performs control to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player because the power is cut off. Thereafter, the power failure of the CU 3 is restored and the power is turned on, and the CU 3 is replaced and a new CU 3 starts operating.

  In addition, when CU3 which was operating before CU replacement has stored the number of balls, the number of balls may be stored in another card (for example, a card inside the CU) and discharged. At that time, if the number of balls cannot be stored in the card due to a failure of the CU, etc., the number of balls is received regularly from the CU3 (for example, every 5 seconds) and stored in a backup. The player may be compensated for the loss based on the data stored in the server 801 (the number of holding balls).

  When the exchanged CU3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3. Is done. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800 via the hall server 801), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. However, since CU3 has been exchanged, it does not have a previous last transmission serial number. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. The P base 2 compares the previous last transmission serial number = 0 transmitted from the CU 3 after replacement with the previous final transmission serial number = n backed up inside the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). To do. As a result, since the two do not match, the game information stored in the P stand 2 is transmitted to the CU 3 for performing the recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2 returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) including the presence of game information storage to the CU 3 as having game information to perform recovery processing for the CU 3 after replacement. The recovery information notified to the CU 3 by this recovery response includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n, the card ID of the inserted card, the card insertion time, the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m as the previous gaming machine information, and the previous gaming machine information. It is included. The previous game table information includes the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. The CU 3 transmits a communication start request including the serial number = 2 to the P unit 2 without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2. CU3 performs recovery processing (game balls = 480, cumulative ball count = + 3, subtractive ball count = + 23) using the previous game machine information received from P machine 2, and sets the last transmission serial number of the previous game. Update and back up the data, card ID, and card insertion time. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. Upon receiving a status information response including unnotified gaming machine information, the CU 3 waits for insertion of a card that was being inserted last time or waits for a store clerk remote control operation (game ball count). When a card is inserted in this state, the CU 3 reads the ID of the inserted card with a card reader / writer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read card ID matches the recovery card ID stored based on the recovery response (the card ID of the previously inserted card). If it is determined that they match, the store clerk waits for a remote control operation to resume the game. If there is a remote control operation, a card insertion notification command including the store code and the SC board ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. The P unit 2 backs up the store code and SC board ID data received at the time of the previous card insertion before the communication interruption to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171 and is transmitted from the backed up data and the CU3. The store code and the SC board ID are compared to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the game can be resumed. Note that a card insertion notification command including a store code and an SC board ID may be transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 without waiting for a remote control operation. In the case of mismatch, error processing such as invalidating the game ball number data of the P unit 2 is performed, for example. Alternatively, an error notification may be made instead of or in addition to this. Further, it may be controlled to forcibly eject the inserted card and return it to the player.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal sequence 4 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 17 explains the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3 to P stand 2 has not been reached) and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 17, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. Here, the last last transmission addition serial number = m is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. When CU3 has a larger value (newer) than the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3 being backed up compared to the final transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of P unit 2 (mismatch) Then, it is determined that the previous status information request command has not been reached, and the addition recovery process is performed.

  As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P unit 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2.

  The P table 2 performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. At this timing, an addition process that has not been realized due to power-off is realized, and the number of game balls matches on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. Further, the P platform 2 returns a response 2 indicating that the addition processing is OK to the CU 3 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). CU3 which received it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the above-described recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3. Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 5 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 18 particularly illustrates the counting process when the addition response has not yet reached (the response to the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 18, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or longer is required.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number. Response of the status information response including = m + 1 is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. The P machine 2 returns a response of the status information response to the CU 3, updates the last transmission addition serial number last time, and backs up the updated data and the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and CU3 matches the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the last final transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3, the addition recovery Clear the addition request state without requesting processing. In addition, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as a recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal Sequence 6 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition response is not reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 19 particularly illustrates the counting process when the addition response has not reached (the response to the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 19, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power failure occurs in the CU 3. In order for the P unit 2 to detect a communication line disconnection, a period in which the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or longer is required.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3 and processes the addition request without knowing that the operation of the CU3 is stopped. However, for some reason (for example, the number of game balls has reached the upper limit), a situation in which game balls cannot be added occurs. In this case, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the game ball addition result = NG and the addition serial number = m to the CU 3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. In addition, since the game ball addition abnormality has occurred in the P unit 2, the addition ball from the CU 3 cannot be processed, and the previous last transmission addition serial number = m is not updated.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. In addition, in P stand 2, it is in the state of game ball addition abnormality. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the last final transmission sequence number = n + 1 to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). (Previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, Previous last transmission addition sequence number = m)). The recovery information includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the last last transmission addition sequence number = m.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and CU3 does not match the last transmission addition sequence number = m of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in CU3, the addition recovery Request processing. For this reason, the CU 3 transmits the recovery request 2 including the last final transmission addition serial number = m + 1 and the number of additional balls = 125 to the P unit 2.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 notifies the recovery response 2 that the game ball addition is not processed (game ball addition NG) due to the game ball addition abnormality. The recovery response 2 includes recovery result = processing NG.

  CU3 which received it performs the 3rd check mentioned later. Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P base 2 returns a communication start response to the CU 3.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including the game ball addition request = ON, the number of addition balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2 in order to notify the P unit 2 of the addition request again. Receiving this, the P stand 2 is in an addition abnormal state, and transmits a state information response including the number of game balls = 50, a game ball addition result = NG, and an addition sequence number = m to the CU 3. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 7 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of balls to be added when the addition request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 20 illustrates the counting process when the addition request has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication line disconnection (addition request command from CU3 to P unit 2 has not been reached) and the communication counterparts after restoration do not match. FIG.

  In FIG. 20, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2, Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At this time, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of the stored balls, sets the number of balls to be added = 125, and backs up the data of the previous last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 is further replaced and the new P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained. Note that the CU 3 performs addition recovery even when the P stand 2 is replaced.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns the recovery information backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command. However, since the P base 2 is newly exchanged, the previous last transmission addition serial number is not backed up, and the initial value “0” is transmitted to the CU 3.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previous last transmission addition sequence number of the recovery information matches the stored previous last transmission addition sequence number. If the last transmission addition sequence number = 0 of the recovery data of P unit 2 and the previous last transmission addition sequence number = m + 1 stored in the CU3 being backed up do not match, CU3 has not issued a previous status information request command. It is determined that it has been reached, and addition recovery processing is performed. As a specific addition recovery process, recovery of the number of added balls = 125 balls is requested to the P unit 2. Therefore, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request 2 (number of balls to be added = 125, previous last transmission addition serial number = m + 1) to the P unit 2.

  The P table 2 performs an addition process to the number of balls to be added included in the recovery request 2, updates the previous last transmission addition serial number, and backs up the data. Further, the P platform 2 returns a response 2 indicating that the addition processing is OK to the CU 3 (recovery response 2 (processing result = processing OK)). CU3 which received it clears the addition request state. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the above-described recovery response is an appropriate value. The third check process for checking is executed. This third check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and returns a communication start response to the CU 3. Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 175) as a status information response. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

<< Abnormal sequence 8 >>
Next, the recovery process of the number of balls when the count response is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 21 particularly illustrates the counting process when the count response is not reached (the count response command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match FIG.

  In FIG. 21, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 adds the number of balls to the number of balls and sets the number of balls to 100, updates the last transmission count sequence number last time, and backs up the updated data. However, after the P table 2 receives the status information request command, the power supply is cut off and the operation stops. For this reason, the P base 2 cannot receive a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the count serial number = m + 1, and the count response = ON from the CU 3. That is, in the P base 2, the count response from the CU 3 is not reached.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m + 1, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Therefore, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 before the communication interruption has reached the CU 3. In this case, the P stand 2 executes a process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P stand 2 is updated from the number of game balls = 500 to the number of game balls = 400 at this time. Further, the P base 2 returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3 based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P unit 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P unit 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 400) as a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3 and number of game balls = 400. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal system 9 >>
Next, a recovery process for the number of counting balls when the count request is not reached due to power-off / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 22 particularly illustrates the counting process when the counting request has not yet reached (the counting request command from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 22, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  However, before the CU 3 receives the status information response command, the power is cut off and the operation stops. That is, CU3 does not reach the count request from P table 2. Thereafter, since the status information request from the CU 3 is not transmitted, the P stand 2 performs control to detect the communication line disconnection and stop the game after 3 seconds. Specifically, the payout control unit 171 transmits a stop command to the firing control board 31, and the firing control board 31 stops the rotational drive of the firing motor 18.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2, the previous last transmission count sequence number = m of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission count sequence number = m + 1 backed up in the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Since there is no (mismatch), it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3 before the communication disconnection has not reached the CU 3. In this case, the P stand 2 does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of game balls, and turns off the counting request state. That is, the P table 2 cancels the count request transmitted immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption, and maintains the number of game balls = 500 at this time. Further, the P base 2 returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3 based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P table 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P table 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. Receiving it, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Abnormal Sequence 10 >>
Next, another recovery process of the number of counting balls when the counting response is not reached due to the power interruption / communication line interruption will be described. FIG. 23 particularly illustrates the counting process when the counting response is not reached (the counting response command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached) due to power interruption or communication line disconnection, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. FIG.

  In FIG. 23, the initial number of possessed balls is 0 and the number of game balls is 500. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a sequence number = n, a count sequence number = m, and a count response = OFF to the P unit 2. Thereafter, in the P platform 2, the count button 28 is pressed, and a count request is transmitted to the CU3. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 500, the counting serial number m + 1, the counting ball number = 100, the counting serial number m + 1, and the counting request = ON to the CU3. . In addition, the P-unit 2 notifies the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 100, and the counted counting sequence number = m + 1, updates the previous last transmission counting sequence number, and updates the updated data and counting request state ON. Back up your data.

  In response to this, the CU 3 executes a process of adding the number of balls to the number of balls, but some abnormality occurs and the addition process cannot be performed. For this reason, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a counting sequence number = m and a counting response = OFF (because of an abnormal counting state). However, after receiving the command for requesting the status information, the P base 2 has been powered off and has stopped operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3. That is, in the P base 2, the count response from the CU 3 is not reached.

  CU3 cannot retransmit the response for 200 milliseconds after the command transmission because P-station 2 is stopped, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times. The CU 3 detects a communication line disconnection by not receiving a response even if the command is retransmitted.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission count serial number = m, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2 first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in the P stand 2. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P table 2, the last transmission count sequence number of the received recovery request = m (“m” is not updated due to a count error) and the inside of the P table 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17). Since the last transmission count sequence number that was backed up last time = m + 1 does not match (disagreement), the state information response that was last transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3 before the communication interruption does not reach the CU3 I can judge. In this case, the P stand 2 does not execute the process of subtracting the counted number of balls from the number of gaming balls, turns off the count request state, and decreases the previous last transmission count number by 1 (−1). At this time, the P stand 2 cancels the count request before the occurrence of the power interruption and maintains the number of game balls = 500. Further, the P base 2 returns a recovery response as a response to the CU 3 based on the received recovery request command. Note that the “store code” and the “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “store code” and the “SC board ID” held by the P board 2 do not match the P board 2. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the recovery response first checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2 as the recovery response is an appropriate value. Execute the check process. This first check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Since CU3 does not perform addition recovery processing, CU3 transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to P table 2 without transmitting recovery request 2 to P table 2. Note that the CU 3 processes the previous gaming machine information received from the P machine 2, updates the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the data. When the CU 3 transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2 receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P platform 2 clears the recovery data (game information) and also clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P table 2 is started, the CU 3 transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P table 2. Receiving it, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of unreported game table information (number of game balls = 500) by a status information response. Specifically, the status information response includes a transmission sequence number = 3 and the number of game balls = 500. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the status information response performs a second check process for checking whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Run. This second check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<< Addition request error >>
Next, processing for abnormal addition request will be described. FIG. 24 is a sequence diagram for explaining the processing in particular when the result of adding game balls at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout is abnormal.

  In FIG. 24, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU3. Since the count request included in the response of the status information response is OFF (not shown), the count serial number remains m and is transmitted to the CU 3 without counting up.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, and sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125 balls, and addition serial number = m + 1 to P unit 2. Then, the information (addition number of balls = 125 balls) of converting the possession balls / storage balls into game balls is notified. At this time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of add balls) = 175, the updated last transmission addition serial number and the addition request state ON.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2. Therefore, upon receiving the CU3 status information request command, the P stand 2 sets the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), the game ball addition result = NG, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3. The P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game ball addition result = NG and the last transmission addition serial number information.

  The CU3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG receives the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. Resend to table 2. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 1 to n + 2, and the additional serial number remains m + 1 and the status information request command is retransmitted.

  However, the P stand 2 remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command of CU3, the P platform 2 receives a serial number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition sequence number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Further, the CU3 that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the status information request including the serial number = n + 3, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The command is retransmitted to P stand 2 for the second time. Although CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, the serial number is updated and counted up from n + 2 to n + 3, and the status information request command is retransmitted with the addition sequence number remaining m + 1.

  P stand 2 is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, upon receiving the retransmitted status information request command from CU3, the P stand 2 receives a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before game ball addition), a game ball addition result = NG and an addition serial number = A response of the status information response including m is returned to CU3.

  Processing for adding a game ball in the P table 2 when the CU 3 receives a response of a response of a status information response including the game ball addition result = NG from the P table 2 even if the command for requesting the state information is retransmitted twice As a result, it becomes a state of waiting for addition abnormality recovery.

  After the addition abnormality is restored in the P unit 2, the CU 3 retransmits to the P unit 2 a status information request command including a serial number = n + X, a game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125 balls, and an addition serial number = m + 1. . In the P 2, since the addition abnormality has been recovered, the addition processing to the game balls is performed and the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 The last transmission addition serial number is updated and the data is backed up.

  After performing the addition processing to the game balls, the P stand 2 transmits a state information response including the serial number = n + X, the number of game balls = 175, the addition serial number = m + 1, and the game ball addition result = OK to the CU 3. In response to this, the CU 3 turns off the addition request state.

<Operation related to addition serial number>
FIG. 25 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P base 2 and the CU 3 regarding the addition serial number. When a game ball addition request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and an additional serial number as shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 25 is transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P stand 2.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and an additional serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the message (1) returns a message (2) that includes the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message, as in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, addition sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. The P table 2 that has received the message (3) returns the message (4) including the same normal serial number n and the additional serial number m as the received message.

  As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, unless an addition request is generated, the addition sequence number is not updated.

  Next, when an addition request (due to a ball lending operation or a withdrawal operation for a stored ball) occurs, a request message of (5) in which one addition serial number is updated is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 (normal serial number n + 2). , Addition serial number m + 1). This request message includes data in which the addition request bit is turned ON. At this stage, the CU 3 has already confirmed the processing for the addition request (card balance withdrawal or savings withdrawal).

  The P platform 2 receives the request message (5) and recognizes the addition request based on the fact that one addition serial number has been updated from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current addition request. This determination is performed by, for example, the payout control unit 171 of the P stand 2. The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not processing for adding game balls is possible on the P platform 2 side. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached a predetermined upper limit value.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (6) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (6) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (5). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the addition sequence number is the addition sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (6). The normal serial number is n + 2 included in the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message.

  The CU 3 includes an area for backup storage of the addition sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message, and an area for backup storage of the normal sequence number included in the reception message. These areas are provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 that has received the message (6) compares and determines the addition sequence number stored in the backup and the addition sequence number included in the message (6). As a result, if the stored addition sequence number is the same as the addition sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, when the transmitted addition serial number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (5) 'of FIG. 25 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, since the P base 2 waits for a message from the CU 3, no message is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the request message (5) ′, and retransmits the same request message (5) ″ because there is no response from the P-unit 2.

<Operation related to counting serial number>
FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 regarding the counting sequence number. When the counting request is not generated, a message including a normal serial number and a counting serial number as shown in (1) to (3) of FIG.

  In (1), a message including a normal serial number n and a counting serial number m is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. The P table 2 that has received the electronic message (1) returns the electronic message (2) including the same normal serial number n and the counting serial number m as the received electronic message, as shown in (2).

  The CU 3 that has received the message (2) transmits the message (3) (ordinary sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m) with one updated normal sequence number. As described above, every time the CU 3 receives a message from the P platform 2, the CU 3 updates one normal serial number and transmits the next message. On the other hand, the P platform 2 does not update the normal serial number. Further, the counting sequence number is not updated unless a counting request is generated.

  Next, when a counting request (detection of counting operation) is generated, the request message (4) in which one counting sequence number is updated is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3 (normal sequence number n + 1, counting sequence number m + 1). ). This request message includes data in which the count request bit is turned ON. Note that the P platform 2 does not execute the counting process at this stage.

  The P table 2 receives the request message (4) and recognizes the counting request based on the fact that the counting sequence number has been updated by one from the previous time. Then, it is determined whether or not to accept the current counting request. This determination is made, for example, by the CU control unit 323 of the CU3. The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the counting process (the adding process of the holding balls) is possible. The case where the counting process is not possible is, for example, a case where the process using a holding ball (such as a wagon service) is in progress.

  When the request is accepted, an acceptance message of the two messages (5) is transmitted, and when the request is rejected, a rejection message of the two messages (5) is transmitted. In the acceptance message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m + 1 included in the request message of (4). On the other hand, in the rejection message, the counting sequence number is set to the counting sequence number m included in the message transmitted / received immediately before (4). The normal serial number is updated from the request message in (5) for both the acceptance message and the rejection message, and is n + 2.

  The P table 2 includes an area for backup storage of the counting sequence number and the normal sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. Such an area is provided, for example, in the microcomputer of the payout control unit 171 of the P table 2. The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 that has received the message (5) compares and determines the count sequence number stored in the backup and the count sequence number included in the message (5). As a result, if the stored counting sequence number is the same as the counting sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been accepted. On the other hand, if the transmitted counting sequence number is delayed by one (m in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected.

  (4) 'in FIG. 26 shows a case where the request message does not reach the P table 2 due to noise or other factors. In this case, the CU 3 waits for a predetermined period (200 ms) after transmitting the message (3), and retransmits the same message (3) because there is no response from the P platform 2. The P-station 2 that has received the retransmitted message (3) has the normal sequence number included in the message n + 1, and the normal sequence number is transmitted even though the request message (4) ′ has been transmitted first. Therefore, it is determined that the request message (4) ′ has not arrived. Then, the P platform 2 retransmits the same request message (4) ″ as (4) ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request sequence number (additional sequence number, counting sequence number) different from the normal sequence number is included in the message and transmitted. These request serial numbers are added and updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and otherwise, the addition and update are not performed even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is transmitted from the CU 3 regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (the normal serial number is updated by both the CU 3 and the P unit 2). You may act.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party can be determined using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but is the received message an acknowledgment message indicating request acceptance? It cannot be specified whether the message is a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, a request message with an updated request sequence number is transmitted using a request sequence number such as an addition sequence number or a counting sequence number as in this embodiment, and the request sequence number included in the request message as a response to this request message If a message containing the same request serial number is received, depending on the value of the serial number, not only whether the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party, but whether the message returned from the other party is an acceptance message. Can be specified. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. It is possible to identify whether the message is a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

  In this embodiment, the update value for the request sequence number when a request is generated is +1. However, this is an example, and other update values such as +2, +3, -1, and -2 are adopted. May be.

<First to third check processing>
Next, the first check process, the second check process, and the third check process executed by the CU control unit 323 will be described based on FIGS. 27 (a), 27 (b), and 28. FIG.

  First, the first check process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 300, it is determined whether or not game table information is stored. This is to determine whether or not the gaming machine information is included in the recovery response transmitted from the P machine 2, and in the case of FIGS. 15 and 16, the gaming machine information (specifically, Is included in the previous game table information), YES is determined in S300. If it is determined that the game table information is not included, the first check process ends.

  If it is determined that there is storage of gaming machine information, the control proceeds to S301, and the added ball number included in the received gaming machine information (specifically, previous gaming machine information) is a predetermined threshold value. A determination is made whether N1 or greater. This threshold value N1 is the maximum number of game balls to be added during a period (200 ms) between the state information request and the state information response between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 (for example, the maximum addition ball at the time of big hit) It is set to a value (for example, 125) that is slightly larger than the equation (120). Therefore, in the normal case, the received number of added balls should be smaller than the threshold value N1. However, the number of added balls larger than the threshold N1 means that the game table information including the number of added balls and the number of game balls illegally increased due to fraud etc. being performed on the P table 2 while offline is a recovery response. May be transmitted to CU3. In that case, the control advances to S304, and control for notifying the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 is performed, and control for transmitting an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred to the hall server 801 is performed. (In this case, error notification may be performed by the hall server 801). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S305, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  Even if an abnormality is determined as a result of the check processing in S301 and S303, the information stored on the CU3 side is that the cause is that the CU3 or the P stand 2 is replaced with a new one after communication disconnection, and then the communication is restored. And the information transmitted from the P base 2 during the recovery process may be completely different. Even though it is not such a fraudulent act, it may be determined that there is an abnormality, and for this reason, it is possible to cancel the reset waiting state by operating the remote control by the game hall staff, and intervene by human judgment by the game hall staff. So that they can respond normally.

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S301, the control proceeds to S302, and the number of added balls received from the P units is added to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323, and the number of subtracted balls is set. An operation for subtracting and calculating R1 as the calculation result is performed. That is, when it is determined that the number of added balls included in the game table information received from the P table 2 is appropriate, the latest number of game balls R1 is calculated using the added ball number and the subtracted ball number. It is calculated. Next, in S303, the calculated R1−the absolute value of the received game balls, that is, the difference between R1 and the received game balls is calculated, and whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold N2. Judgment is made. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility that an illegal act will occur as described above, and control proceeds to S304 and thereafter as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323.

  Next, the second check process will be described with reference to FIG. The number of balls to be added in the game table information (specifically, the current game table information) included in the status information response from the P table 2 returned in response to the status information request immediately after the communication start response is determined in advance. A determination is made in S310 as to whether or not it is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3. The number of added balls received is from the time when the P unit transmits a status information response to the CU3 until the power supply is interrupted to the P unit or until the game stops when the P unit detects a communication line disconnection. The number of added balls that fluctuated in (5) is such that the amount of change in the number of added balls within a relatively short limited period of time is not so large, but within a certain upper limit. Therefore, a value (for example, 125) slightly larger than the upper limit (for example, 120) is determined as the threshold value N3. If the number of added balls received is equal to or greater than the threshold value N3, the control proceeds to S314, and control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the display 312 and an error occurs in the hall server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to the effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801 may be performed). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S315, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  On the other hand, if NO is determined in S310, the control advances to S311 to add the received addition ball number to the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323 and subtract the received subtraction ball number. Thus, an operation for calculating R2 is performed. The “stored number of game balls” referred to here is the number of game balls received from the P-unit 2 when NO is determined in S303 as described above. Then, in S312, it is determined whether or not the difference between the R2 and the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value N4. Originally, R2 and the received number of game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N4. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N4, there is a possibility of fraudulent behavior as described above, and control proceeds to S314 and subsequent steps as described above.

  If NO is determined in S <b> 312, the control proceeds to S <b> 313 and the CU control unit 323 stores the number of game balls received from the P stand 2 as the initial number of game balls, and then performs the second check process. Control ends.

  After the processing of S313 is performed, normal status information requests and status information responses are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P base 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323 receives the initial value by S313. Using the number of game balls stored as the number of game balls as an initial value, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and transmitted from the P unit 2 based on the current number of game balls. It is determined whether or not the difference from the number of incoming game balls exceeds a predetermined error ball number (for example, 5), and if it exceeds, an abnormality is determined and the above-described S304, S305, S314, and S315 The same control is performed.

  Next, the control of the third check process will be described based on FIG. The CU control unit 323 executes the third check process immediately after receiving the recovery response 2 from the P base 2 (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 20).

  As described above, the recovery request 2 and the recovery response 2 are the game balls in which the P stand 2 complies with the game ball addition request even though the CU 3 outputs a game ball addition request to the P stand 2. This is for performing recovery of the number of game balls when the addition process is not performed. Then, the recovery result 2 sent from the P base 2 to the CU 3 notifies the processing result as to whether or not the addition recovery processing has been normally performed. In S320, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not the recovery result is processing NG. If processing NG, that is, addition recovery is not performed normally, the control proceeds to S324, where control is performed to notify the occurrence of an error by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312 and an error has occurred in the hall server 801. Control is performed to transmit an error notification signal to this effect (in this case, error notification by the hall server 801 may be performed). Instead of or in addition to the hall server 801, it may be controlled to transmit an error notification signal to the hall management computer.

  Next, the control advances to S325, and the CU control unit 323 enters a reset waiting state. After entering the reset waiting state, the CU control unit 323 stops the control until a reset release signal is input to the IR photosensitive unit 320 by a remote control operation by an attendant at the game hall, and when the reset signal is input, the CU The control unit 323 is reset and returns to the same state as when the power is turned on (see FIG. 8).

  On the other hand, if the recovery result is processing OK, the control advances to S321, and the CU control unit 323 performs processing for adding the number of added balls transmitted to the P unit 2 to the number of game balls currently stored. . This is because the addition recovery for the number of balls in the game ball addition request output by the CU 3 is normally performed in the P unit 2, so that the number of balls to be added is added to the number of game balls and the current normal game ball is This is a process for calculating the number.

  Next, the control advances to S322, and an operation is performed to calculate R3 by adding the number of added balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to the number of game balls after the addition and subtracting the number of subtracted balls. The number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are game machine information (specifically, previous game machine information) transmitted from the P machine 2 as a recovery response, and the previous game machine information is included in the recovery response. When there is no ball, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are both zero, and as a result, the number of game balls after addition = R3 is calculated.

  Next, in S323, it is determined whether or not the difference between the calculated R3 and the number of game balls received by CU3 is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value N2. Originally, R1 and the number of received game balls are the same value, and the difference between them should be zero. However, an error ball may occur between the CU side and the P base side during the game as the control proceeds. The error balls (for example, 5) are set as the threshold value N2. Therefore, when the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is equal to or greater than the threshold value N2, there is a possibility that an illegal act will occur as described above, and control proceeds to S324 and subsequent steps as described above.

  On the other hand, if the difference between R1 and the received number of game balls is less than the threshold N2, it is determined that the received number of game balls is an appropriate value, and the received number of game balls is determined as the new number of game balls. Is stored in the CU control unit 323.

  As described above, the previous gaming machine information is transmitted first as gaming machine information from the P machine 2 to the CU 3, and then the gaming machine information is transmitted this time so that both gaming machine information can be distinguished on the CU 3 side. Since it is transmitted, the CU control unit 323 can determine the suitability of both pieces of game machine information. As a result, for example, the number of game balls in the previous game table information sent from the P table 2 should not be significantly different from the number of game balls stored in the CU control unit 323 at the present time, For example, the game ball number data in the current game table data sent thereafter is not so different from the game ball number data in the previous game table information received by the CU 3. If there is a large gap in the difference between these data, it can be determined that the game ball number data is illegally inflated.

  If the total data obtained by adding the previous game machine data and the current game data is collectively transmitted from the P machine 2 to the CU 3, compared to the case where the previous game machine data and the current game machine data are individually determined. Therefore, it is only possible to roughly discriminate, and accordingly it is difficult to discriminate fraud. In order to prevent such inconvenience, the game table data is transmitted in two stages so that the CU control unit 323 can distinguish between the two types of data, making it possible to perform detailed abnormality determination for each game table data. It is easy to distinguish.

  In the first check process to the third check process described above, after determining whether or not the number of balls to be added is appropriate, the current number of game balls is calculated based on the number of balls to be added when it is appropriate. The number of game balls is compared with the number of game balls transmitted from the P unit 2 to determine whether or not the number of game balls transmitted is appropriate. The number of game balls may be compared with the number of game balls stored in the CU 3, and the suitability may be determined.

  Further, the CU 3 stores the final number of game balls stored before the recovery process (hereinafter referred to as “CU game ball number”) and the number of game balls in the previous game table information received from the P table 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P The number of game balls in the latest game table received from the P table 2 (hereinafter referred to as “P latest game ball number”) is determined by comparison between the three parties. You may make it perform determination. As a specific example of comparison between the three players, the number of CU gaming balls and the number of previous P balls are compared and determined. If correct, the previous number of P balls and the number of latest P balls are compared and determined. To do. Alternatively, the number of CU game balls and the number of previous P game balls are compared and determined, and if they are correct, the number of CU game balls and the latest number of P game balls are compared and determined. Furthermore, the P number of the previous game balls and the P number of the latest game balls are compared and determined first, and if they are correct, the CU game ball number and the P number of previous game balls are compared and determined. The latest number of game balls is compared and determined.

  The first check process to the third check process are preferably executed when the CU 3 and the P stand 2 are not exchanged (replaced). When exchange (replacement) is performed at the time of communication disconnection, the number of game balls on the CU side and the P stand side is generally greatly different in the recovery process. This is because an error is determined as a result of the check process to the third check process. Therefore, when the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is exchanged after the communication is disconnected, the first check process to the third check process may be controlled not to be performed in the recovery process when the communication is restored. Specifically, when the difference between the last last transmission sequence number transmitted from the P unit 2 as a recovery response and the last latest transmission sequence number stored in the CU control unit 323 is 2 or more, the CU 3 or the P unit 2 The CU control unit 323 determines that it has been replaced, and controls so that the CU control unit 323 does not perform the first check process to the third check process.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the CU 3 or the P stand 2 is exchanged, it may be controlled so that the previous game table data and the current game table data are not checked on the CU 3 side at the time of recovery. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the troublesomeness that the check abnormality determination due to the replacement of the CU 3 or the P stand 2 occurs.

<Operation related to request serial number>
Next, the serial number update method described in the communication sequence shown in FIGS. 6 to 26 is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, a serial number updating method as described below may be applied to the communication sequences shown in FIGS.

<< Update both serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 29 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the operations of the P platform 2 and the CU 3 regarding the request serial number. One of the A apparatus and the B apparatus shown in FIG. 29 is the P stand 2, and the other is the CU3. A device that generates a request to the other party is an A device, and a device that receives a request from the A device is a B device.

  When the A device is CU3 and the B device is the P unit 2, the request sequence number is an addition sequence number, and the request is a game ball addition request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  When the A device is the P platform 2 and the B device is the CU3, the request sequence number is a count sequence number, and the request is a game ball count request. A specific communication sequence in this case is as shown in FIG.

  Here, both cases will be conceptualized and described. While there is no request for the B device, the A device transmits a message in which the request serial number m is not updated as shown in (1). However, the normal serial number n is updated every time a message is transmitted. The device B receives this and returns a message as shown in (2). In this message, the normal serial number is updated to n + 1. However, the request sequence number is not updated as m.

  While the request is not generated in the device A, as shown in (1) and (2), both of them transmit a message while updating the normal serial number. During this time, it is determined whether or not the message transmitted immediately before has reached the partner by looking at the normal serial number included in the message received from the partner.

  When a request is generated in the A device, the A device updates the request sequence number to m + 1, and transmits a request message including the updated request sequence number m + 1 to the B device as shown in (3). At this time, the normal serial number is also updated to n + 2. The request message includes data in which the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) is turned ON.

  The B device that has received the request message including the request sequence number m + 1 determines whether or not to accept the request. For example, if it is a counting request, it is determined whether or not the process of adding balls is possible on the CU3 side. Or if it is an addition request | requirement, it will be determined whether the process which adds a game ball in the P stand 2 side is possible. The case where the addition processing of the holding balls is not possible is, for example, the case where the processing using the holding balls (such as a wagon service) is in progress. The case where the game ball addition process is not possible is, for example, a case where the game ball has already reached the predetermined upper limit value.

  When accepting the request, as described above in (4), an acknowledgment message with the request serial number updated to m + 2 is transmitted to the A device. On the other hand, when rejecting the request, as described below in (4), a rejection message (also referred to as a rejection message; the same applies hereinafter) that has not been updated with the request sequence number being m + 1 is sent to the A device. Send. The normal serial number is updated to n + 3 in any case.

  The A device includes storage means for storing the request sequence number included in the immediately preceding transmission message. The device A that has received the message (4) compares and determines the request sequence number stored in the storage means and the request sequence number included in the message (4). As a result, if the stored request sequence number is the same as the request sequence number included in the transmitted message (m + 1 in this example), it is determined that the request has been rejected. On the other hand, if the value obtained by adding a predetermined number (1 in this example) to the stored request sequence number and the request sequence number included in the transmitted message are the same (m + 2 in this example) (in other words, If the request sequence number that has been transmitted is advanced by one), it is determined that the request has been accepted. If it is determined that the request has been accepted, the request sequence number is further updated by one, and a message including a specific request value (the number of counting balls or the number of additional balls) is transmitted to the B device. On the other hand, when it is determined that the request has been rejected, a message including the received request sequence number is transmitted to the B device.

  FIG. 29 (3) 'shows a case where the request message (3) does not reach the device B due to noise or other factors. In this case, the device B determines that there is no response when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 200 ms) has elapsed since the transmission of the message (2), and retransmits the message (2). As a result, the message (2) arrives at the A device that transmitted (3) '. Then, although the device A has transmitted the request message of the request sequence number m + 1, the request sequence number of the reply message to this does not correspond to either request acceptance or request rejection (from the request sequence number included in the request message). Since the request serial number is delayed), it is determined that the request message has not arrived. Such a determination can also be made using a normal serial number. That is, the normal sequence number included in the request sequence number is n + 3, whereas the normal sequence number included in the reply message is n + 2, and it can be determined that the request message has not been reached based on such a situation.

  When it is determined that the request message has not arrived, the device A retransmits the request message (3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a request serial number is included in a message and transmitted separately from a normal serial number. The request sequence number is updated when an operation such as an addition request or a count request is requested to the communication partner, and the update is stopped when the request operation ends or when the request is rejected. In other periods, the message is not updated even if a message is transmitted / received.

  On the other hand, the normal serial number is updated every time a message is exchanged regardless of whether there is a request to the communication partner (note that the normal serial number is updated only on one of the A device and the B device, The other may perform the operation of returning the serial number received from the other party as it is.)

  For this reason, in the case of a normal serial number, it is possible to determine whether or not the transmitted request message has arrived at the other party using the serial number included in the received message from the other party, but the received message is an acceptance message indicating the request acceptance. Or a rejection message indicating a request rejection.

  However, as described above, when the request sequence number is used as in this embodiment, not only whether the requested request message has arrived at the other party, but also the message returned from the other party is accepted by the request sequence number. It is possible to specify whether it is a message or a rejection message. Of course, as in the present embodiment, since the request message includes data with the request bit (addition request bit or count request bit) turned ON, the received message is an acceptance message even by determining this data. Or a rejection message. However, if the request sequence number is used, such request bits can be deleted from the message. As a result, the amount of message data can be reduced, and the processing for determining the request bit of the message data can be made unnecessary.

<< Update only one of serial number and requested serial number >>
FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the operations of the P base 2 and the CU 3 regarding the normal serial number and the requested serial number. This modification is different from the example shown in FIG. 29 in that the normal sequence number is not updated when the requested sequence number is updated.

  That is, in this modified example, when a request is not generated between the normal serial number and the request serial number, only the normal serial number is updated and the message is exchanged. However, when a request occurs, the normal sequence number update is stopped and only the requested sequence number is updated. Thereafter, when a series of processing for the request ends or when a rejection message for the request is transmitted, the update of the request sequence number is stopped, and the update of the normal sequence number is started instead.

  For this reason, in the exchange of messages before the occurrence of the request shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 30, the normal sequence number is updated to n and n + 1, while the request sequence number m is not updated. However, in the request message (3) transmitted when a request is generated, the normal sequence number remains n + 1 and is not updated, while the request sequence number is updated to m + 1. Similarly, neither the acceptance message nor the rejection message (4) for the request message is updated with the normal serial number kept at n + 1.

  Even in this case, the device A that has received the message (4) can determine whether the message is an acceptance message or a rejection message by determining the request sequence number included in the message.

  In addition, as shown in (3) ′, even when the request message does not reach the B device and the message (2) is retransmitted from the B device, the A device receives the request message based on the request sequence number. You can determine that you did not.

  As in this modification, even if the update of the normal sequence number is stopped from when the request occurs until the processing for the request is completed, there is no problem because the request sequence number takes over the function of the normal sequence number during that time. Does not occur. In addition, there is also an effect that processing for updating the normal serial number or collating the normal serial number is unnecessary during that time.

  Next, processing for the gaming system according to the present embodiment to prevent the gaming machine from operating outside business hours will be described.

<Notice method for business closure>
First, the hall needs to stop the operation of the P stand 2 outside the business hours after the business end time elapses. . However, in many cases, many players continue to play games even after the end of the business hours of the hall, because the players are immersed in the game and forget the passage of time. For this reason, the hall needs to appropriately notify the player that the business hours have ended. It was also necessary to prevent the gaming machine from being illegally operated after the hall was closed. Therefore, a notification method for notifying such a player that the business hours have ended will be described below.

  FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming system 2000 according to the present embodiment. In the example of FIG. 31, a plurality of P units 2 installed in a hall (store A), a CU 3 connected to each P unit 2, and a hall server 801 connected to the plurality of CUs 3 are shown. . The hall server 801 is a device that manages the P platform 2 and the CU 3. Although not shown, the hall server 801 has a CPU as a control center, a ROM storing programs and control data for operating the CPU, a large-capacity storage such as a RAM functioning as a work area of the CPU, and an HDD. An input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with the device and peripheral devices, a communication interface for communicating with an external device, a timer for measuring time, and the like are provided. Hereinafter, according to the reference numerals (1) to (4) shown in FIG. 31, the flow of processing until notification of the end of business in each P stand 2 will be specifically described.

  (1) First, the hall server 801 directly receives sales information including at least information that allows the employee of the store A to operate the terminal when the server is introduced or the business hours are changed, and the business end time of the store A is specified. Set sales information by inputting. Preferably, the sales information further includes information capable of specifying the business start time of the store A. In this case, the business information may include business start time information and business end time information, respectively, or may include business time zone information that can identify these. For example, in the case of business start time information, information indicating the time of “10:00” which is the business start time, and in the case of business end time information, information indicating the time of “22:00” which is the business end time, business hours If it is band information, it is information indicating a time band of “10: 00 to 22:00”. Hall server 801 may set sales information by receiving a command including sales information of store A from a management device outside the store. The hall server 801 may store the set business information in a storage device such as a RAM or an HDD.

  (2) The hall server 801 determines whether the current time has passed the business end time based on the set business information. Specifically, the hall server 801 compares information that can specify the business end time included in the business information with the current time to determine whether or not the current time has passed the business end time (the sales at the store A). Whether or not the time has expired. Whether the current time has passed the business end time is determined by determining whether the current time is the same as the business end time or whether the current time is later than the business end time. Is included.

  (3) When the hall server 801 determines that the current time has passed the business end time, the hall server 801 transmits business end information indicating that the business end time has passed to each P unit 2. In the example of FIG. 31, the hall server 801 is connected to the P stand 2a (model ID: model A) via the CU 3a, to the P stand 2b (model ID: model B) via the CU 3b, and to the P stand 2c via the CU 3c. A configuration for transmitting the business end information to (model ID: model C) is shown. The business end information includes, for example, business end flag information indicating that the business has ended (for example, information “1” when the business end time has passed, information “0” when the business end time has not passed), Business end time information (for example, information of business end time “22:00”). The hall server 801 may transmit the business end information to the P platform 2 without going through the CU3. Whether or not the time indicated by the timer incorporated in the P base 2 has passed the business end time based on the business end information directly transmitted from the hall server 801 without passing through the CU 3 May be determined.

  The hall server 801 transmits the business end information to the P platform 2 via the CU 3 as described above. Therefore, the business end information is once transmitted from the hall server 801 to the CU 3, and further transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. For this reason, the CU 3 simply relays the business end information received from the hall server 801 and transmits the same data as it is to the P platform 2 as long as it includes at least information indicating that the business end time has elapsed. It may be converted into data and transmitted to the P platform 2. When converting the business end information into different data, for example, the business end flag information received from the hall server 801 is converted into a communication command between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, or the business end flag received from the hall server 801. You may convert into the data which added the information which shows the state of CU3 to information.

  Furthermore, the case where the business end flag information is converted into a communication command between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 will be specifically described. The CU 3 transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2 as described above. This status information request command includes data of “sequential number”, “command”, “CU state”, “addition ball number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. Further, in order to transmit the business end flag information to the P-unit 2, “business end flag information” is added to the command of the status information request. That is, in the status information request command, a bit indicating the business end flag information is added. If the bit is “1”, information indicating that the business end time has elapsed, and if “0”, information indicating that the business end time has not elapsed. including.

  In addition, when the CU 3 converts the business end flag information into a status information request command and transmits it to the P stand 2, in addition to the information indicating that the business end time has elapsed, whether or not a card is inserted, whether the card is being prepared for return The “CU state” such as “no” is also included in the command and transmitted.

  (4) The P platform 2 receives the business end information transmitted from the hall server 801. And the P stand 2 alert | reports that the business in the shop A was complete | finished based on the received business completion information. Specifically, since the business end flag information is “1”, the P platform 2 displays an image (business end image) indicating that the business has ended on the variable display device 278 shown in FIG. 1. Or P stand 2 outputs the voice (business end voice) which shows that business was ended from speaker 270. The business end image and the business end sound are respectively an image and a sound indicating, for example, “Today's business has ended.” Further, the notification of the end of business is not limited to direct character display or voice output, but may be a character display or music performance suggesting the end of business. In addition, notification of the end of business may be performed by lamp lighting control of the gaming machine (for example, changing the brightness to decrease with the end of business or changing the color to a lighter color). .

  In addition, when the game state is a specific game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state, a probable change state, a short-time state, etc.), the player expects that the player has been closed. There may be disadvantages such as hindering the performance of the gaming state that has been performed. Therefore, if the P stand 2 is in the specific gaming state when notifying that the business has ended, the P display 2 displays a smaller business end image on the variable display device 278 compared with the normal gaming state, The end sound may be output from the speaker 270. The P stand 2 may display the business end image and output a business end sound for notification. In addition, since notifying that the business has ended during the specific gaming state may harm the player's mood, the P stand 2 postpones the notification until the specific gaming state ends, Notification may be performed after the end of the specific gaming state. Of course, even in the specific gaming state, notification may be made immediately after receiving the business end information without delay. Thereby, since notification according to the game situation is possible, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the business has ended without incurring any disadvantage.

  Here, the P base 2 stores the received business end information in the storage unit E configured by a RAM or the like. Based on the business end information stored in the storage unit E, the P platform 2 can also notify the end of business at the store A. Therefore, the P platform 2 can notify that the business has ended without continuing to receive the business end information from the hall server 801. In other words, the storage unit E of the P platform 2 functions as a data buffer that allows the player to be notified of the end of business without continuously transmitting the business end information to the hall server 801. Thereby, even if the P stand 2 is removed from the CU 3, it is possible to notify that the business has ended and to prevent operation outside business hours. In addition, when the P stand 2 does not have the memory | storage part E, the P stand 2 will alert | report that the business was complete | finished during the period when the business end information is transmitted.

  Note that the storage unit E may store operation history information indicating whether an operation that can be detected by the P platform 2 has been performed. In addition to the operation history information, the storage unit E may store information including a game history indicating whether or not a winning history or a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state, a short time state, or the like) is controlled. . The operations that can be detected by the P table 2 include operations that can be detected by a sensor provided on the P table 2 such as a power-on operation of the P table 2 and an opening / closing operation of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5. Thereby, the unauthorized use of the P stand 2 outside business hours can be prevented.

  The CU 3 is not limited to transmitting the business end information received from the hall server 801 to the P platform 2, and may perform a process of closing the store based on the business end information. Specifically, when the CU 3 converts the business end flag information into a status information request command and transmits it to the P unit 2, the status information request command transmitted to the P unit 2 includes “business end flag information”. = Information of “1” is added, and Bit 1 of “CU state” is changed from “1” indicating that the card unit is open to “0” indicating that the card unit is closed.

  When the P table 2 receives from the CU 3 a command for requesting the state information in which the Bit 1 of the “CU state” is “0”, the P table 2 starts an automatic counting process for processing all the game balls held as the number of counting balls. That is, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 with the status information response as all the number of game balls it holds.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3 can be extracted from the card insertion / discharge port 309, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309 (card extraction possible state).

  Then, when the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3 notifies the P unit 2 of information indicating that the card return preparation state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. For this reason, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command in which the Bit 5 of the “CU state” is “1” to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 displays a message “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278 to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the card.

  Note that, as will be described later, the CU 3 transmits the business start information received from the hall server 801 to the P-unit 2, but performs a process for setting a store opening state based on the business start information as in the case of the business end information. May be. Specifically, when the CU 3 converts the business start flag information into a command for requesting the status information and transmits it to the P console 2, the “business start flag information” is added to the command for the status information request transmitted to the P console 2. = "1" information is added, and Bit 1 of "CU state" is changed from "0" indicating that the card unit is closed to "1" indicating that the card unit is being opened.

  Next, the flow of processing until the notification of the end of business in the P platform 2 is stopped will be described. Hereinafter, according to the reference numerals (5) to (7) shown in FIG. 31, the process flow until each P stand 2 stops notification of the end of business will be specifically described. It is assumed that the hall server 801 sets sales information further including information that can specify the business start time. Further, it is assumed that the P platform 2 maintains a notification of the end of business.

  (5) The hall server 801 determines whether or not the current time has passed the business start time based on the set business information. Specifically, the hall server 801 compares information that can specify the business start time included in the business information with the current time to determine whether or not the current time has passed the business start time (the sales at the store A). Whether or not the time has started.

  (6) When it is determined that the current time has passed the business start time, the hall server 801 transmits business start information indicating that the business start time has passed to each P unit 2. The business start information includes, for example, business start flag information indicating that the business has started (for example, information “1” when the business start time has passed, information “0” when the business start time has not passed), Business start time information (for example, information of business start time “10:00”). The business start information may be information for resetting the business end information.

  (7) The P platform 2 receives the business start information transmitted from the hall server 801. And the P stand 2 stops the notification of the business end in the store A based on the received business start information. Note that the business end notification may be stopped at a timing such as turning on the power after the power is turned off, an operation by a store clerk, or the elapse of a certain period from the business end notification. As described above, the P platform 2 automatically stops the notification of the end of the business when the current time has passed the business start time, and therefore does not place an extra burden on the employee such as stopping the notification. . When receiving the business start information, the P platform 2 deletes the business end information stored in the storage unit E until then and stores the business start information. Further, when the business end information is used as the business end flag information, the business end flag information “1” is stored in the storage unit E while the P stand 2 notifies the end of business. Therefore, when receiving the business start information, the P platform 2 updates the business end flag information stored in the storage unit E to “0”, thereby stopping the business end notification. The business end flag information is stored in a storage unit that is not erased even if power is interrupted, or is backed up. Therefore, even if the gaming machine intentionally turns off the power and stops the notification or restriction of the end of business, the business end flag information is stored. Can be continued.

<Restricted game at the end of business>
In the above description, a case where the end of the business is notified when the P stand 2 receives the business end information has been described. However, in the following, a case where the game at the P stand 2 is restricted when the P end 2 receives the business end information will be described. To do. Hereinafter, according to the reference numerals (1) to (4) shown in FIG. Since the flow from (1) to (3) is the same as the flow from (1) to (3) in the above-mentioned <notification method at the time of closing business>, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  (4) The P platform 2 receives the business end information transmitted from the hall server 801. And the P stand 2 restrict | limits the game in the P stand 2 based on the received business end information. Specifically, the P platform 2 controls the firing motor 18 of the P platform 2 to stop the launch of the game ball, prohibits the lending to the game ball even if the ball lending button 321 is pressed, The symbol variation in the variable display device 278 of the table 2 is stopped.

  When the game is limited to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability change state, a short time state, etc.) that is advantageous for the player, There is a case where the game that was expected cannot be performed and a disadvantage is caused. Therefore, if the P table 2 is in a specific game state when restricting the game, the restriction content is changed so as to apply a weaker restriction than in the normal game state. For example, the P stand 2 may stop the launch of game balls in the normal game state, but may limit the number of fire balls per unit time in the specific game state. In addition, the P platform 2 stops the launch of the game balls in the normal game state, while the ball rental to the game balls is restricted in the specific game state, and the number of game balls at the present time You may be limited to games within. Furthermore, the P stand 2 stops the launch of the game ball in the normal gaming state, while it is restricted to not perform a lottery by winning after the business end time in the specific gaming state. Good. In addition, since limiting the game during the specific game state may harm the player's mood, the P stand 2 suspends the limit until the specific game state ends, The restriction may be performed after completion. Of course, even if the game is in a specific gaming state, the restriction may be made immediately after receiving the business end information without delay. As described above, since the restriction according to the game situation is possible, it is possible to appropriately prompt the player to finish the game without giving a disadvantage.

  Here, the P base 2 stores the received business end information in the storage unit E configured by a RAM or the like. The P stand 2 can also limit the game based on the business end information stored in the storage unit E. Therefore, the P table 2 can limit the game without continuously receiving the business end information from the hall server 801. That is, the storage unit E of the P unit 2 functions as a data buffer that allows the game to be restricted without causing the hall server 801 to constantly transmit business end information. Thereby, even if P stand 2 is removed from CU3, a game can be restricted and operation outside business hours can be prevented. In addition, when the P stand 2 does not have the memory | storage part E, the P stand 2 will restrict | limit a game during the period when the business end information is transmitted.

  Next, a flow until the game restriction on the P platform 2 is released will be described. Hereinafter, according to the reference numerals (5) to (7) shown in FIG. It is assumed that the P table 2 sets sales information further including information that can specify the business start time. Further, it is assumed that the P table 2 is in a state where a game is restricted. Note that the flow from (5) to (6) is the same as the flow from (5) to (6) in <Notification at the time of closing> described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  (7) The P platform 2 receives the business start information transmitted from the hall server 801. And the P stand 2 cancels the game restrictions on the P stand 2 based on the received business start information. In this way, since the P table 2 automatically releases the game restriction when the current time has passed the business start time, it does not place an extra burden on the employee such as releasing the restriction.

<Business closing information transmission process>
If the hall server 801 determines that the business end time has elapsed as a result of comparing the business information with the current time as described above, the hall server 801 transmits the business end information. Here, the business end information transmission process executed by the hall server 801 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining the business end information transmission process executed by the hall server 801 according to the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 32, hall server 801 first sets sales information (S251). Specifically, the hall server 801 sets sales information including at least information that can specify the business end time of the store A.

  Next, the hall server 801 determines whether the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information and the current time (S253). When it is determined that the business end time has not elapsed (S253: NO), the hall server 801 repeats the process of S253. In contrast, if the hall server 801 determines that the business end time has passed (S253: YES), the hall server 801 transmits the business end information to the P unit 2 (S255), and ends the process.

  The processing in the case where the hall server 801 transmits business start information corresponds to the processing in which “business end” is replaced with “business start” in the above processing.

<End of business notification process>
As described above, the P platform 2 notifies the end of business when it receives the business end information. Here, the business end notification process executed by the P platform 2 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart for explaining the business end notification process executed by the P platform (pachinko machine) 2 according to the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 33, first, P platform 2 receives business end information from hall server 801 via CU3 (S271).

  Next, the P stand 2 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the specific gaming state (S273). When it is determined that the current gaming state is not the specific gaming state (S273: NO), the P table 2 notifies the end of business in a normal notification mode (S275). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the specific gaming state (S273: YES), the P stand 2 notifies the end of business so that it is less noticeable than usual (S277). Specifically, the P stand 2 displays a smaller business end image on the variable display device 278 than in the normal gaming state, or outputs a smaller business end sound from the speaker 270. Alternatively, the P stand 2 may display a business end image and output a business end sound.

  The process of restricting the game when the P table 2 receives the business end information is the process of restricting the game at the P table 2 to the process at S275, and the process of limiting the game at the P table 2 at S277. It is equivalent to the one that has been replaced with a process that makes each weaker.

<Modified example of the closing method and game restriction method>
In the gaming system 2000 described with reference to FIG. 31, the hall server 801 sets sales information, determines whether the business end time has elapsed based on the set business information, and the business end time has elapsed. Is sent to the P stand 2 via the CU3. Then, the business end is notified based on the business end information received by the P stand 2 (or the game is limited). Further, the hall server 801 determines whether or not the business start time has elapsed based on the set business information, and transmits the business start information to the P unit 2 when the business start time has elapsed. Then, based on the business start information received by the P platform 2, the business end notification is stopped (or the game restriction is released).

  However, various modification examples are conceivable for the business end notification method (game restriction method). Below, the typical modification of the alerting | reporting system (game restriction | limiting method) of a business end is demonstrated based on drawing. Note that the business end notification method (game restriction method) is not limited to the configuration described below.

<Modification 1>
FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming system 2100 according to the first modification. In the gaming system 2100 shown in FIG. 34, in one aspect, the hall server 801 sets sales information and transmits the set sales information to the CU3. The CU 3 determines whether the business end time has elapsed based on the received business information. If the business end time has elapsed, the CU 3 generates business end information and stores it in the storage unit A. Further, the CU 3 transmits the stored business end information to the P platform 2. Then, the P platform 2 notifies the end of business based on the business end information (or restricts the game).

  In another aspect, it is determined whether or not the business start time has elapsed based on the business information set by the CU 3, and when the business start time has elapsed, the business start information is generated and the storage unit A To remember. Further, the CU 3 transmits the stored business start information to the P platform 2. Then, based on the business start information received by the P platform 2, the business end notification is stopped (or the game restriction is released).

  Hereinafter, the operation of the gaming system 2100 according to the first modification will be specifically described in accordance with the reference numerals (1A) to (7A) shown in FIG. 34, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 31, and detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  (1A) First, the hall server 801 sets sales information including at least information that can specify the business end time of the store A. Preferably, the sales information further includes information capable of specifying the business start time of the store A. In this case, the business information may include business start time information and business end time information, respectively, or may include business time zone information that can identify these. The hall server 801 is configured to be able to change the sales information of the store A by receiving an instruction from a management device outside the store, or by receiving an instruction from an employee of the store A. May be. The hall server 801 may store the set business information in a storage device such as a RAM or an HDD.

  (2A) The hall server 801 transmits the set business information to each CU3. In the example of FIG. 34, the hall server 801 transmits business information to the CU 3a, CU 3b, and CU 3c.

  (3A) Each CU 3 determines whether the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information transmitted from the hall server 801. Specifically, each CU 3 stores the business information set and transmitted by the hall server 801 as a criterion for determining whether or not the business end time has passed. Then, each CU 3 compares the current time measured with the information that can specify the business end time included in the business information stored in advance as a criterion, so that the current time has passed the business end time. It is determined whether or not (business hours of store A have ended). Each CU 3 is provided with a timer or the like for measuring time. Further, when each CU 3 determines whether or not the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information, the business information transmitted from the hall server 801 is stored in advance as described above. Even if it uses as a reference | standard, when making determination without memorize | storing sales information, you may use the sales information inquired to the hall server 801 as a determination reference | standard. Of course, the hall server 801 is configured to transmit business information to each CU 3 at a predetermined interval, and each CU 3 transmits when determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time. It may be configured to use the business information that has been provided. When each CU 3 determines that the current time has passed the business end time, the CU 3 stores business end information indicating that the current time has passed the business end time in the storage unit A constituted by a RAM or the like. The business end information stored in the storage unit A is, for example, business end flag information indicating that the business has ended (for example, information “1” when the business end time has passed, and “when the business end time has not passed” 0 ”) and business end time information (for example, information of business end time“ 22:00 ”). The storage unit A of the CU 3 functions as a data buffer for transmitting business end information to the P unit 2. Thereby, even if the CU 3 is disconnected from the hall server 801, it is possible to notify that the business has ended, and to prevent operation outside business hours.

  (4A) The CU 3 transmits the business end information stored in the storage unit A to the P unit 2. The P stand 2 notifies that the business at the store A has ended based on the received business end information. Specifically, since the business end flag information is “1”, the P stand 2 displays the business end image on the variable display device 278 shown in FIG. 1. Alternatively, the P stand 2 outputs a business end sound from the speaker 270. Note that the CU 3 constantly transmits the business end information stored in the storage unit A to the P unit 2, so that the P unit 2 can maintain the business end notification based on the received business end information. . Thereby, the P table 2 can maintain the notification without securing a storage area for storing the business end information separately.

  If the P game 2 is in a specific gaming state when notifying that the business has ended, the P display 2 can display a smaller business closing image on the variable display device 278 than in the normal gaming state, The end sound may be output from the speaker 270. Thereby, since notification according to the game situation is possible, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the business has ended without incurring any disadvantage.

  Further, the storage unit A may receive and store operation history information indicating whether or not an operation detectable by the P table 2 has been performed from the P table 2. Thereby, the unauthorized use of the P stand 2 outside business hours can be prevented.

  Next, the flow until the notification of the end of business in the P platform 2 is stopped will be described. Hereinafter, according to the reference numerals (5A) to (7A) shown in FIG. 34, the flow until the notification of the end of business in each P stand 2 is specifically described. It is assumed that the hall server 801 sets sales information further including information capable of specifying the business start time in (1A). Furthermore, it is assumed that the P platform 2 maintains the business end notification based on the business end information transmitted from the CU 3.

  (5A) The hall server 801 transmits business information further including information capable of specifying the business start time to each CU 3. In the example of FIG. 34, the hall server 801 transmits business information to the CU 3a, CU 3b, and CU 3c.

  (6A) Each CU 3 determines whether the current time has passed the business start time based on the set business information. Specifically, each CU 3 compares the current time with information that can specify the business start time included in the business information to determine whether or not the current time has passed the business start time (the sales at the store A). Whether or not the time has started. If each CU 3 determines that the current time has passed the business start time, the CU 3 stores the business start information indicating that the business start time has passed in the storage unit A constituted by a RAM or the like. The business start information stored in the storage unit A is, for example, business start flag information indicating that the business has started (for example, information “1” when the business start time has passed, “when the business start time has not passed” 0 ”) and business start time information (for example, information of business start time“ 10:00 ”).

  (7A) The CU 3 transmits the business start information stored in the storage unit A to the P unit 2. The P stand 2 stops the business end notification based on the received business start information. (Or remove the game restrictions). For example, when the P stand 2 receives the business start flag information (information of “1”) as the business start information, the process of stopping the business end notification is started, and the business end flag information is changed from “1” to “0”. Change to In addition, when the P stand 2 receives the business start time information (information of “10:00”) as the business start information, the P base 2 is registered in advance (for example, the time zone 8: 00 to 11: 00), the processing for stopping the business end notification is started, and the business end flag information is changed from “1” to “0”. The reference registered in advance in the P base 2 is registered in the P base 2 at the time of manufacture or when the power is turned on. In this way, the P stand 2 automatically stops the business end notification when the current time passes the business start time (or automatically releases the game restrictions), so There is no additional burden such as stopping the notification (or releasing the restriction).

<Modification 2>
FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming system 2200 according to the second modification. A gaming system 2200 shown in FIG. 35 is a system further including a management center 800B connected to the hall server of each store in the gaming system 2000 shown in FIG. The management center 800B is provided, for example, for each prefecture, and business hours defined by the regulations of each local government are set. The function of the management center 800B may be configured to be included in the key management server 800. The management center 800B has a large-capacity storage such as a CPU (not shown) as a control center, a ROM storing programs and control data for operating the CPU, a RAM functioning as a work area for the CPU, and an HDD. An input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with the apparatus and peripheral devices, a communication interface for communicating with the hall server of each store, and the like are provided.

  In the gaming system 2200 shown in FIG. 35, in one aspect, the management center 800B sets sales information, determines whether the business end time has passed based on the set business information, and the business end time has passed. If so, the business end information is transmitted to the hall server 801. Next, the business end information received by the hall server 801 is transmitted to the P platform 2 via the CU3. Then, the business end is notified based on the business end information received by the P stand 2 (or the game is limited).

  In another aspect, it is determined whether the business start time has passed based on the business information set by the management center 800B. If the business start time has passed, the business start information is sent to the hall server 801. Send. Next, the business start information received by the hall server 801 is transmitted to the P platform 2. Then, based on the business start information received by the P platform 2, the business end notification is stopped (or the game restriction is released).

  Hereinafter, the gaming system 2200 according to the modified example 2 will be described in detail according to the reference numerals (1B) to (7B) shown in FIG. Here, for ease of explanation, a case where business end information or business start information is transmitted to the hall server 801 of the store A will be described. The schematic diagram shown in FIG. 35 attaches the same reference numeral to the same configuration as the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 31, and detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  (1B) First, the management center 800B sets sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the store A. Preferably, the sales information further includes information capable of specifying the business start time of the store A. In this case, the business information may include business start time information and business end time information of the store A, or may include business time zone information that can identify them. The management center 800B may be configured to be able to change the sales information of each store in response to an instruction from the administrator. The management center 800B may store the set sales information in a storage device such as a RAM or an HDD.

  (2B) The management center 800B determines whether the current time has passed the business end time of the store A based on the set business information. Specifically, the management center 800B compares the current time with information that can specify the business end time of the store A included in the business information, and determines whether the current time has passed the business end time (store Whether or not the business hours of A have ended). When the management center 800B determines that the current time has passed the business end time of the store A, the management center 800B transmits business end information indicating that the business end time has passed to the hall server 801.

  (3B) Upon receiving the business end information from the management center 800B, the hall server 801 transmits the received business end information to each P unit 2. In the example of FIG. 35, the hall server 801 is connected to the P stand 2a (model ID: model A) via the CU 3a, to the P stand 2b (model ID: model B) via the CU 3b, and to the P stand 2c via the CU 3c. The case where business end information is transmitted to (model ID: model C) is shown. The business end information includes, for example, business end flag information indicating that the business has ended (for example, information “1” when the business end time has passed, information “0” when the business end time has not passed), Business end time information (for example, information of business end time “22:00”).

  (4B) The P platform 2 receives the business end information transmitted from the hall server 801. And the P stand 2 alert | reports that the business in the shop A was complete | finished based on the received business completion information. Specifically, since the business end flag information is “1”, the P platform 2 displays an image (business end image) indicating that the business has ended on the variable display device 278 shown in FIG. 1. Or P stand 2 outputs the voice (business end voice) which shows that business was ended from speaker 270. The business end image and the business end sound are respectively an image and a sound indicating, for example, “Today's business has ended.”

  If the P game 2 is in a specific gaming state when notifying that the business has ended, the P display 2 can display a smaller business closing image on the variable display device 278 than in the normal gaming state, The end sound may be output from the speaker 270. Thereby, since notification according to the game situation is possible, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the business has ended without incurring any disadvantage.

  Here, the P base 2 stores the received business end information in the storage unit E configured by a RAM or the like. Based on the business end information stored in the storage unit E, the P platform 2 can also notify the end of business at the store A. Therefore, the P platform 2 can notify that the business has ended without continuing to receive the business end information from the hall server 801. In other words, the storage unit E of the P platform 2 functions as a data buffer that allows the player to be notified of the end of business without continuously transmitting the business end information to the hall server 801. Thereby, even if the P stand 2 is removed from the CU 3, it is possible to notify that the business has ended and to prevent operation outside business hours. In addition, when the P stand 2 does not have the memory | storage part E, the P stand 2 alert | reports that the business was complete | finished during the period when the business end information is transmitted.

  Note that the storage unit E may store operation history information indicating whether an operation that can be detected by the P platform 2 has been performed. Thereby, the unauthorized use of the P stand 2 outside business hours can be prevented.

  Next, the flow until the notification of the end of business in the P platform 2 is stopped will be described. Hereinafter, according to the reference numerals (5B) to (7B) shown in FIG. It is assumed that the management center 800B sets sales information further including information that can specify the business start time in (1B). Furthermore, it is assumed that the P platform 2 maintains the business end notification based on the business end information transmitted from the CU 3.

  (5B) The management center 800B determines whether the current time has passed the business start time of the store A based on the set business information. Specifically, the management center 800B compares the current time with information that can specify the business start time of the store A included in the business information, and determines whether the current time has passed the business start time (store It is determined whether or not the business hours of A have started. If the management center 800B determines that the current time has passed the business start time of the store A, the management center 800B transmits business start information indicating that the business start time has passed to the hall server 801.

  (6B) Upon receiving the business start information from the management center 800B, the hall server 801 transmits the received business start information to each P unit 2 via the corresponding CU3. In the example of FIG. 35, the hall server 801 is connected to the P stand 2a (model ID: model A) via the CU 3a, to the P stand 2b (model ID: model B) via the CU 3b, and to the P stand 2c via the CU 3c. The case where business start information is transmitted to (model ID: model C) is shown.

  (7B) The P platform 2 receives the business start information transmitted from the hall server 801. And the P stand 2 stops the notification of the end of business based on the received business start information (or cancels the game restriction). In this way, the P stand 2 automatically stops the business end notification when the current time passes the business start time (or automatically releases the game restrictions), so There is no additional burden such as stopping the notification (or releasing the restriction). When receiving the business start information, the P platform 2 deletes the business end information stored in the storage unit E until then and stores the business start information. Further, when the business end information is used as the business end flag information, the business end flag information “1” is stored in the storage unit E while the P stand 2 notifies the end of business. Therefore, when receiving the business start information, the P platform 2 updates the business end flag information stored in the storage unit E to “0”, thereby stopping the business end notification.

<Configuration of open detection and connection detection>
The pachinko machine 2 according to the present embodiment has a configuration for detecting the opening of the glass door 6, detecting the opening of the front frame 5, and detecting the connection between the front frame 5 and the game board 26. FIG. 36 is a block diagram for explaining opening detection and connection detection of the pachinko machine 2 according to the present embodiment. The front frame 5 and the game board 26 shown in FIG. 36 (a) are electrically connected by a concave drawer connector 33 provided on the front frame 5 side and a convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26 side. . The front frame 5 includes an open detection unit 53, a front frame relay board 52, a payout control board 17, and a concave drawer connector 33 connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500. That is, the power line 500 is wired to the opening detection unit 53, the front frame relay board 52, the payout control board 17 and the concave drawer connector 33 provided in the front frame 5, and the respective connections are disconnected (for example, disconnection or When the connector is disconnected, no current flows through the power line 500. The game board 26 has a convex drawer connector 32 and a main control board 16. By connecting the convex drawer connector 32 to the concave drawer connector 33, the main control board 16 is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500. In other words, the power line 500 is also wired to the convex drawer connector 32 and the main control board 16 provided on the game board 26, and when the connection is disconnected (for example, disconnection or disconnection of the connector), the power line 500 No current flows in the. The convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 correspond to board connection detection means that can detect the electrical connection between the front frame 5 and the game board 26 by disconnection.

  The power line 500 is included in wiring in a signal cable (for example, the signal cable 36 shown in FIG. 3) that transmits and receives signals between the front frame 5 and the game board 26. The signal cable of the front frame 5 and the signal cable of the game board 26 are connected by a 26-pin or 32-pin convex drawer connector 32 and a concave drawer connector 33. In FIG. 36A, the signal cable is not shown, and only the loop-shaped power line 500 is shown.

  FIG. 36B is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the opening detection unit 53. The open detection unit 53 includes an open detection switch 12a, a current detector 12b, and a count counter 120. The opening detection switch 12a is a glass door opening detection switch 12 that detects opening of the glass door 6 and a front frame opening detection switch 13 that detects opening of the front frame 5. When the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened ( (OFF state) The loop-shaped power lines 500 are connected in series so as to be disconnected. FIG. 36B shows a case where one opening detection switch 12a is shown for the sake of simplicity of explanation, but in an actual configuration, the glass door opening detection switch 12 and the front frame opening detection switch 13 are not shown. Corresponding to each, an open detection switch 12a is provided.

  The current detector 12 b is connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500 and detects a current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500. When the current flowing through the loop-shaped power line 500 is no longer detected, the current detector 12b detects that the open detection switch 12a is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected. can do. The current detector 12b outputs a detection signal to the count counter 120 when detecting that the open detection switch 12a is in the OFF state or the connection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected. The current detector 12b is backed up so that the power of the main power supply is supplied from the power supply circuit of the P stand 2 and can operate even when the main power supply is turned off (for example, at night). Power from the power supply is being supplied.

  The counting counter 120 calculates the number of times the glass door 6 is opened, the number of times the front frame 5 is opened, and the number of times that the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are disconnected based on the detection signal from the current detector 12b. Count. FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the count counter 120 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 37, the counting counter 120 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 10a as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 10b storing an operation program and control data of the CPU 10a, and a work of the CPU 10a. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 10c functioning as an area and an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 10d are provided.

  The count counter 120 is supplied with the power of the main power supply from the power supply circuit of the P stand 2, and the power of the backup power supply so as to be operable even when the main power supply is turned off (for example, at night). Is supplied. A clock signal (CLK signal) and a chip select signal (CS signal) are input from the payout control board 17 shown in FIG. 4, and a data signal indicating the value of the number of detections counted by the count counter 120 is a payout control unit. 171 is output.

  The count counter 120 counts the total number of times the glass door 6 is opened, the number of times the front frame 5 is opened, and the number of times the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are disconnected, and indicates the value of the number of detections. Output data signal. The counting counter 120 can individually detect and count the number of times the glass door 6 is opened, the number of times the front frame 5 is opened, and the number of times that the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are disconnected. You may comprise. In addition, the number of times the main control board 16 is removed from the game board 26 by the connecting portion between the power line 500 of the game board 26 and the power line 500a of the main control board 16 functioning as a main control connection detection means is also counted by the counter 120. Can be detected. The connecting portion between the power line 500 of the game board 26 and the power line 500a of the main control board 16 may be connected by a connector such as a drawer connector or may be directly soldered and connected. Here, the power line 500 a of the main control board 16 is configured as a part of the loop-shaped power line 500.

  Next, based on FIG. 38, the detection of the opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 and the disconnection of the connection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 will be described. In the P stand 2 shown in FIG. 38A, the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened, and the opening detection unit 53 and the front frame relay board 52 are electrically disconnected. When the opening detector 53 and the front frame relay board 52 are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500, and the current detector 12b may detect the opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5. it can.

  Further, in the P platform 2 shown in FIG. 38B, the connection between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected, and the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are electrically disconnected. The situation is shown. When the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are electrically disconnected, no current flows through the loop-shaped power line 500 (that is, no current flows when the wiring constituting the power line 500 is disconnected). The current detector 12b can detect disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33. As shown in FIG. 38, the opening detection switch 12a of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 and the panel connection detection means of the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 are connected in series by a loop-shaped power line 500. Yes. Therefore, the opening detection unit 53 can detect not only the opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 but also the disconnection between the front frame 5 and the game board 26.

  Next, based on FIG. 39, the storage state of the data stored in the RAM 10c and the state in which the data signal is output in accordance with the input of the CS signal and the CLK signal will be described.

  In the RAM 10c, a storage area for storing data of 1 to 18 bits of 18 bits is prepared. In the image in the RAM 10c of FIG. 39, the bit storage areas 1 and 2 are areas for storing whether the CU3 is disconnected or in a normal state where the disconnection has not been performed. At the time of disconnection, a value other than 01 is stored.

  In the image of the RAM 10 c, the bit data storage areas 3 to 8 indicate the number of times the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened at the start of power OFF of the P base 2, and the relationship between the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33. This is a storage value area for storing the number of times of disconnection (disconnection) (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of detections). This stored value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110, and becomes 111111 at the time of overflow exceeding this range.

  Bit data storage areas 9 to 14 in the image in the RAM 10c are current value storage areas (current value tables) for storing the current values of the number of detections. This current value takes a value in the range of 000000 to 111110. The storage of the current value storage area (current value table) is not initialized by an external operation. However, as will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (c), in a normal time when the power supply of the P base 2 is ON, when the current value reaches the upper limit, it is counted up from the initial value again and loops.

  The bit data storage areas 15 and 16 in the image of the RAM 10c take a value of 01 at a normal time when power is not interrupted and a value of 10 at a power disconnection. The bit data storage areas 17 and 18 in the figure of the image in the RAM 10c take a value of 01 after transmitting the number of detections to the payout control unit 171 and take a value of 10 before sending.

  As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40B, the current value storage area (current value table) is configured such that the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened and convex when the power is cut off (when the power is turned off). Every time the connection between the mold drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33 is disconnected (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the opening of the glass door 6 or the front frame 5), the memory stored in the storage areas 3 to 8 is stored. The value is represented as n. Each time the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened, it is counted up as n + 1, n + 2,... And the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is further opened after it is counted up to the upper limit n + 61. The value is 63 (the value at which the round flag is set), and no further count-up is performed.

  Then, when the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned on, it is output to the payout control unit 171 as 12-bit data of 1 to 12 as shown in FIG. This data output indicates a normal time when the bit data in FIGS. 1 and 2 is 01, and a disconnection with the CU3 when the bit data is not 01. For the bit data of 3 to 8, the difference value (value in the range of 000000 to 111110) is output as a difference value obtained by subtracting the current value from the stored value at times other than the above-described overflow time. On the other hand, at the time of overflow, a value of 111111 is output.

  In addition, after the current value storage area (current value table) is counted up to n + 61 which is the upper limit, the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is further opened and the value becomes 63 (a value in which the round flag is set). The count up may be continued even after. In this case, the final count value is not output when output to the payout control unit 171 but the above-described overflow value “111111” is output.

  The bit data of 9 and 10 has a value of 01 at normal time and 10 at power interruption. Since the output of bit data 9 and 10 is 10, it can be seen that, for example, the counting counter 120 is replaced at night. In other words, since these counters 120 are replaced, both the main power source and the backup power source are not supplied to the counters 120. In this case, the bit data of 9 and 10 becomes 10, and the 10 By outputting, it becomes possible for the payout control unit 171 to determine that the counter 120 has been illegally replaced at night.

  The bit data of 11 and 12 is 01 after the data is transmitted to the payout control unit 171 and is 10 before the data is transmitted.

  Next, the relationship between the data signal output to the payout control unit 171 and the CLK signal and CS signal input from the payout control board 17 will be described. The RAM 10c of the counting counter 120 stores the current value of the number of detections from the time when the game room is closed and the power supply of the P stand 2 is turned off until the power is turned on at the start of business the next morning. And after the power supply of P stand 2 is started, the payout control part 171 transmits CS signal and CLK signal to the count counter 120 in order to acquire the detection frequency.

  Receiving the CS signal and the CLK signal, the CPU 10a of the counting counter 120 repeatedly loops data until the CS signal falls according to the rising edge of the CS signal and outputs the data to the payout control unit 171. The payout control unit 171 determines that an appropriate data signal has been received when the data signal transmitted repeatedly is read, for example, three times and is the same data three times.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39, when there is no CLK signal for 100 .mu. During the CS signal rising period (when it is at a low level), the data is set to 1 at the next rising edge of the CLK signal. Control to discharge from the bit is performed.

  This 100μ is configured so that the gaming machine maker can input and set it in the register of the counting counter 120. In addition, you may comprise so that it can input and set to a register | resistor in the game hall side.

  In addition, after the CS signal and the CLK signal have performed a predetermined operation, when the round flag is set, control is performed to clear the value stored in the RAM 10c of the count counter 120 and set the value to 000000. For example, the stored value of the CPU (register) 10a is cleared at the stage where the CLK signal repeats ON and OFF a predetermined number of times after the CS signal becomes low level.

  Note that a backable RAM is used as a memory to detect that the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened even when the power of the P table 2 is turned off and store the count value. If 2 is always powered on, a register may be used instead of RAM.

  Next, the control operation of the CPU 10a of the count counter 120 will be described with reference to FIG. First, referring to FIG. 40A, it is determined in step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 whether or not the main power source of the P base 2 is OFF and the backup power source is ON. Since the main power supply is on during normal business hours at the amusement hall, the determination of NO is made at S1, the control proceeds to S7, and the detection signal rises when the glass door 6 or the front frame 5 is opened. Is triggered every time it is opened, and the number of times of opening is counted, and the connection is triggered by the rise of the detection signal associated with the disconnection of the convex drawer connector 32 and the concave drawer connector 33. Every time it is removed, the number of times is counted up. This count-up is counted up in the current value storage area (current value table) described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (c) shows how the current value table counts up normally when the power is turned on. In the current value table, the count value is counted so as to loop, such as counting up from 0, counting up to 62 which is the upper limit thereof, and counting up from 0 again. Then, the values in the current value table counted up in S7 are displayed on the 7-segment display 50.

  On the other hand, during the period from the end of the game hall operation to the turn-off of the P main power supply until the main power supply startup time at the start of business the next morning, YES is determined in S1 and the control is performed in S2. Proceed to In S2, control is performed to store the value (current value) in the current value storage area (current value table) shown in FIG. 39 as a stored value in the area (3 to 8 in FIG. 39). Next, in S3, control is performed to count up the current value in the current value table every time it is opened or disconnected every time the detection signal rises until it returns to the stored value in the current value table. . FIG. 40B shows an aspect of the count-up operation of the current value table at the time of monitoring when the main power source is OFF. The stored value is set to n, counts up from n, counts up to the upper limit thereof, n + 61, and stores 63 as a value in which the one-round flag is set if the detection signal further rises in this state. When the stored value reaches the value at which this round flag is set, the stored value is held at the value of “63” without performing any counting operation even if the detection signal subsequently rises.

Next, the control advances to S4, where it is determined whether or not the main power supply is turned on and the backup power supply is turned off. When the main power supply of the P-unit 2 is started up at the amusement hall at the start of business the next morning, a determination of YES is made in S4 and the control is S
Then, the process proceeds to 5, and when the call from the payout control board 17 is triggered, a control is performed to calculate a difference value based on the stored value of the RAM and the current value and output the difference value to the payout control board 17. As described with reference to FIG. 39, this output is repeated in the form of a loop by constantly repeating the same data while the CS signal is rising (during high level). As described above, the CLK signal is timed out, for example, at 100 μs, and control is performed to output data from the first bit in synchronization with the next rise of the CLK signal.

  Next, in S6, after the data output (CS, CLK predetermined operation), when the round flag is set, the flag is cleared and the stored value stored in the bit storage area of 3 to 8 in the RAM is set to 0. To clear. On the other hand, when the round flag is not set, control is continued without clearing the stored value, and the process proceeds to S7.

  In S6 described above, before the stored value is cleared to 0, the stored value may be overwritten and saved to the current value, and then the stored value may be cleared to 0. In addition, the timing of overwriting and storing the stored value over the current value or clearing the stored value to 0 may be triggered by power-on, but in addition, after the transmission of the detection count data to the payout control unit 171, the difference Any timing may be used as long as the value data can be normally output.

  Next, specific control contents of the count display process by the payout control unit 171 will be described with reference to FIG. First, at S10, data such as a difference value from the count counter 120 is received when the power of the P base 2 is turned on. Next, in S11, it is determined whether or not the received value is a value (= 63) where the round flag is set. If the received value is not the value at which the round flag is set (= 63), the control proceeds to S12, and the received value is displayed on the 7-segment display 50. On the other hand, when the received value is a value (= 63) where the round flag is set, the control proceeds to S13, and the control for displaying the error number on the 7-segment display 50 is performed. This error number is a number representing an abnormality in which the glass door 6 and the front frame 5 are opened during the period when the power supply of the P stand 2 is OFF such as at night and the count value of the current value table reaches the number of times of opening. It is. Next, in S14, control for transmitting the error number to CU3 is performed. The CU 3 receives the error number, notifies the abnormality with an abnormality notification lamp or the like, displays the error number on the display 312, and further displays the error number to a higher-level device (for example, a hall management computer or the hall server 801). Control to send.

  In addition, the CU 3 that has received the error number may perform control to stop the game by the P stand 2 or restrict some functions by the CU 3 itself or in response to a command from the host device.

<Aggregating process performed by the card unit>
CU3 which concerns on this Embodiment performs the total process which totals the frequency | count and ratio which the pachinko ball passed through each area | region according to the launch intensity using the response of the status information response received from P stand 2. FIG.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the counting process performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In step (hereinafter, step is abbreviated as “S”) 10, the CU 3 determines whether or not a response of the status information response is received from the P base 2. If a response to the status information response is received (YES in S10), the process proceeds to S11. If not (NO in S10), the process proceeds to S15.

  In S11, CU3 performs a correction process for the firing intensity. This process is a process for correcting the firing strength T to 0 (minimum value) when the handle operation amount is substantially zero (value when the handle is not operated). By performing this correction processing, even when there is a variation between the handle operation amount and the firing strength T due to play or play of the hitting ball operating handle 25, the firing strength T can be accurately detected. .

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of the firing intensity correction process.
In S111, the CU 3 determines whether or not the power supply of the P stand 2 has just been turned on. For example, the CU 3 determines that it is immediately after power-on of the P unit 2 when the connection sequence processing at the time of power-on is being performed.

  If it is immediately after power-on of the P stand 2 (YES in S111), the CU 3 stores the current launch intensity T in the internal memory as an initial launch intensity T0 in S112. The initial firing strength T0 is the firing strength T when the handle operation amount is zero. That is, the CU 3 assumes that the handle operation amount is 0 immediately after the power of the P stand 2 is turned on, and stores the value in the internal memory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S114.

  On the other hand, if not immediately after power-on of the P platform 2 (NO in S111), the CU 3 reads the initial firing strength T0 stored in the internal memory in S113. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S114.

  In S114, CU3 calculates the value obtained by subtracting the initial launch intensity T0 from the current launch intensity T as the corrected launch intensity T. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S12 in FIG. Since the following tabulation process is performed using the emission intensity T after the correction process, the tabulation process accuracy is improved.

  Returning to FIG. 42, in S12, the CU 3 determines whether or not it is during a period in which the aggregation process should be interrupted (hereinafter referred to as an aggregation interruption period).

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the change in the firing intensity T and the total interruption period. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the firing intensity T that was stable at a relatively small value starts increasing at time t1, reaches the maximum value “99” at time t3, and is maintained at the maximum value “99” after time t3. ing.

  When the firing strength T changes, the passing area of the pachinko balls also changes, but there is a time lag until the passing area of the pachinko balls fired with the changed firing strength T is detected. Therefore, when the launch intensity T changes, even if the change in the launch intensity T thereafter stabilizes (converges to a certain value), the launch intensity T and the pachinko balls There is a possibility that the correspondence relationship with the passing area becomes unstable, and the reliability of the totalization processing result is lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the period from when the firing intensity T changes by a predetermined amount to when the predetermined period elapses is set as a total interruption period. The “predetermined amount” and the “predetermined period” may be fixed values or variable values that can be arbitrarily set and changed from the outside.

  In FIG. 44, the total interruption period is illustrated. In FIG. 44, the period α is exemplified as the total interruption period. This period α is a time t4 when the above-mentioned “predetermined period” has elapsed from the time t1 when the firing intensity T has increased by an amount (the above-mentioned “predetermined amount”) that reaches the threshold T1 from a value lower than the threshold T1. It is a period until. Note that the “predetermined period” is predicted from the start of the period α that the pachinko balls that have been fired after the start of the period α have stabilized the firing strength T and before the firing strength T has stabilized have passed through the game area 27. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period up to the time point.

  In FIG. 44, periods β and γ are also illustrated as examples of other aggregation interruption periods. The period β is a period from the time when the firing intensity T starts to change (time t1) to the next time when the firing intensity T starts to stabilize (time t3). The period γ is a period from time t3 when the firing intensity T starts to change to time t5 when the predetermined period has elapsed after time t3 when the emission intensity T started to stabilize. The “predetermined period” used for setting the period γ can also be set based on the same concept as the “predetermined period” used for setting the period α. A period in which at least one of the periods β and γ is appropriately combined with the period α may be set as the aggregation interruption period.

  Returning to FIG. 42, if the aggregation interruption period is in effect (YES in S12), CU3 interrupts the aggregation process in S14. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S15.

  On the other hand, when not in the total interruption period (NO in S12), CU3 executes a process of totaling the number and ratio of the pachinko balls that have passed through each region by the firing intensity in S13. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S15.

45 to 48 are diagrams illustrating the contents of the total data obtained as a result of the total processing.
In the aggregated data shown in FIG. 45, the number of passes through each area (specifically, the start winning ports 275, 276, 277, the normal winning ports 272, 273, 274, the big winning ports 271, and the probability changing winning ports 271a) 45 are tabulated by intensity T (in the example shown in FIG. 45, by variable area 0 to 99 of firing intensity T divided by 10 areas, the same applies to FIGS. 46 to 48).

  46 and 47, the passing ratios of the respective areas (specifically, the start winning ports 275, 276, 277, the normal winning ports 272, 273, 274, and the big winning port 271) indicate the firing strength T. It is tabulated separately. In FIG. 46, the passage ratio of each region when the total number of passages of each region is 100% is shown for each firing intensity T. On the other hand, in FIG. 47, the passage ratio of each region is shown for each firing strength T when the total number of passages for each region by firing strength T is 100%.

  In the total data shown in FIG. 48, the number of times of passing through each area (specifically, the start winning ports 275, 276, 277, the normal winning ports 272, 273, 274, the big winning ports 271 and the probability changing winning ports 271a) is 100. The percentage of passage of each region when it is set as a percentage is tabulated for each firing intensity T. In FIG. 48, the ratio indicated in parentheses in the column indicating the passing ratio of the probability variation winning opening 271a is the passing ratio of the probability variation winning opening 271a when the number of passages of the large winning opening 271 is 100% (that is, The ratio of the number of passes of the probability variation prize opening 271a with respect to the number of passes of the big prize opening 271) is shown for each firing strength T.

  By referring to the aggregated data as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48, the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T and the pachinko ball passing area (which area the pachinko ball easily passes depending on the firing intensity T) is appropriately set. Can grasp. Therefore, on the store side where the P stand 2 is installed, it is possible to adjust the nail of the P stand 2 with reference to these tabulated results.

  Note that the aggregate data shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Moreover, it is not always necessary to totalize the total data shown in FIGS. 45 to 48, and may be appropriately selected as necessary.

  Returning to FIG. 42, in S15, the CU 3 determines the presence / absence of a display request for the total result. It should be noted that the display request for the total result is input to the CU 3, the P stand 2, the hall server 801, etc., for example, by a game shop clerk. If there is a request for displaying the total result (YES in S15), the process proceeds to S16, and if not (NO in S15), the process ends.

  In S16, CU3 displays the total result (total data as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). The display location may be, for example, the display 54 or another display (not shown).

  As described above, the CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to perform the counting process of counting the number and ratio of the pachinko balls that have passed through each region by the firing strength T. Do. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to grasp which region the pachinko ball is likely to pass (or whether it is difficult to pass). Therefore, the counting result can be used for nail adjustment of the P base 2.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine having the upper shooting structure, such as the P stand 2 according to the present embodiment, compared to the pachinko machine having the lower shooting structure, the pachinko ball is fired until the game area 27 is entered. Since the distance is short, the pachinko ball passage region tends to change more greatly with respect to the change in the firing strength T. In the P base 2 having such an upper shooting structure, the correspondence between the firing strength T and the passing area is totaled, which is very effective for adjusting the nail.

<Fire abnormal determination process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing intensity T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to determine whether or not there is a pachinko ball firing abnormality (coloring abnormality). Judgment processing is performed. Here, the abnormal shooting is an abnormality in which the firing motor 18 is operating even though the pachinko ball is not supplied to the launching device. The irregular hitting may occur when the player leaves the seat while the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed by a fixing device or the like with the handle operation amount being substantially larger than zero.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a firing abnormality determination process performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In S20, CU3 determines whether or not launch intensity T is greater than 0 (minimum value). If firing intensity T is greater than 0 (YES in S20), the process proceeds to S21, and if not (NO in S20), the process ends.

  In S21, CU3 determines whether or not the number of shot balls and the number of balls that have passed through the outlet have changed. In addition, in order to avoid that CU3 is always determined to be abnormal immediately after the start of the game, the number of shots and the number of shots that have been shot out after a certain period of time has elapsed since the firing strength T is determined to be greater than 0 (minimum value). It is determined whether or not the number of balls passing through the mouth has changed.

  If the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing out of the outlet have changed (YES in S21), CU3 determines in S22 that the firing is normal (i.e., there is no abnormal shooting).

  On the other hand, if at least one of the number of shot balls and the number of balls passing out of the outlet has not changed (NO in S22), CU3 determines in S23 that there is a firing abnormality (that is, an abnormal shooting has occurred). To do.

  Thus, CU3 which concerns on this Embodiment determines with the firing abnormality of a pachinko ball, when the firing strength T is larger than 0 (minimum value) and the number of fired balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet are not changed. . For this reason, it is possible to appropriately detect a firing abnormality (coloring abnormality).

<Putting area identification process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses a signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to identify which area of the game area 27 the pachinko ball has been driven into. Include area identification processing.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a driving area specifying process performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In S30, CU3 determines whether or not there is a driving area specifying request. The driving area specifying request is input to the CU 3, the P stand 2, the hall server 801, and the like by a game shop clerk, for example. If there is a driving area specification request (YES in S30), the process proceeds to S31, and if not (NO in S30), the process ends.

  In S31, CU3 performs a process (hereinafter referred to as a “threshold range setting process”) for setting a “fired intensity threshold range” used for specifying the driving area.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between the driving area and the firing intensity threshold range. In FIG. 51, the driving area is divided into a “right hitting area”, a “left hitting area”, and a “bumping area”. In the present embodiment, the “right hit area” is the area on the right side of the game area 27, and the “left hit area” is the area on the left side of the game area 27. Further, the “bumping area” is an area where the pachinko balls are likely to flow toward the start winning opening 276 when the pachinko balls are driven into this area. The “injection area” is generally arranged at the upper left periphery of the variable display device 278, but the position can be adjusted by a nail configuration.

  As shown in FIG. 51, a firing intensity threshold range is set for each driving area. Specifically, the firing strength threshold range AR for specifying the right hitting area AR (lower limit value ARlow to upper limit value ARhi), the firing strength threshold range AL for specifying the left hitting area specified (lower limit value ALlow to upper limit value ALhi), This is a firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) for specifying the concavity region. These firing intensity threshold ranges AR, AL, AB are stored in the internal memory (ROM or RAM) of CU3.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of threshold range setting processing.
In S311, CU3 determines whether or not there is a request for changing the firing intensity threshold range. This change request is input to the CU 3, the P stand 2, the hall server 801, etc., for example, by a game shop clerk.

  If there is a change request (YES in S311), CU3 changes the firing intensity threshold range in S312. Note that the specific change (how much the threshold range is changed) is made, for example, in accordance with a value input by manual operation or download by the store clerk who made the change request. The changed firing intensity threshold range is stored (updated) in the internal memory of CU3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S32 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when there is no change request (NO in S311), CU3 reads the firing intensity threshold range stored in the internal memory in S313. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S32 in FIG.

Returning to FIG. 50, in S <b> 32, CU <b> 3 receives the firing intensity T from P platform 2. Thereafter, CU3 compares the received launch intensity T with the launch intensity threshold range in S33.
In which area of the game area 27 the pachinko ball has been driven is specified. Specifically, when the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AR (more than the lower limit value ARlow and less than the upper limit value ARhi), the driving area is specified as the “right hitting area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AL (more than the lower limit value ALlow and less than the upper limit value ALhi), the driving area is specified as the “left hit area”. When the firing strength T is included in the threshold range AB (when it is equal to or higher than the lower limit value ABlow and lower than the upper limit value ABhi), the driving area is specified as a “bumping area”.

  Thus, CU3 which concerns on this Embodiment specifies the implantation area | region of the pachinko ball according to whether the firing strength T is included in the firing strength threshold range. Thereby, according to the launch strength T, it is possible to specify which region the player is aiming for.

  In the present embodiment, the hitting area of the pachinko ball is specified according to whether or not the launch intensity T is included in the launch intensity threshold range, but whether or not the launch intensity T is equal to or greater than a threshold value. The pachinko ball driving area may be specified according to the above.

  In addition, since the bump area is an area that overlaps a part of the right hit area or the left hit area, the launch intensity threshold range of the hit area is also the same as the launch intensity threshold range of the right hit area or the left hit area. , Some overlap. For this reason, in specifying the driving area, in addition to the right hitting area or the left hitting area, the hitting area may be specified.

<Measurement process performed by the card unit>
The CU 3 according to the present embodiment uses the signal such as the firing strength T included in the response of the state information response received from the P platform 2 to change the design of the variable display device 278 after the player starts the game. A measurement process is performed to measure the time until the start.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of measurement processing performed by CU3 (more specifically, CU control unit 323).

  In S40, CU3 determines whether or not a changing signal has been received from P table 2. If the changing signal is received (YES in S40), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the changing signal has not been received (NO in S40), CU3 determines in S41 whether or not the firing strength T has started to increase from 0 (that is, whether or not the player has started playing). Determine. If firing intensity T has not started increasing from 0 (NO in S41), the process is terminated.

  When firing intensity T starts to increase from 0 (YES in S41), CU3 starts time measurement in S42.

  After starting the time measurement, the CU 3 determines in S43 whether or not a changing signal has been received from the P base 2 (that is, whether or not the symbol of the variable display device 278 has started to change). When the changing signal is not received (NO in S43), CU3 moves the process to S44 and continues time measurement. Thereafter, the process returns to S43, and the time measurement is continued until the changing signal is received.

  When the changing signal is received (YES in S43), CU3 ends the time measurement in S45. As a result, the CU 3 can measure the time from when the player starts the game until the symbol of the variable display device 278 starts to change.

  As described above, the CU 3 according to the present embodiment starts from the time when the firing strength T starts to increase from substantially zero in a state where the changing signal is not received (that is, when the player starts the game). The time until the time when the changing signal is received (that is, the time when the symbol of the variable display device 278 starts to change when the pachinko ball wins one of the start winning ports 275, 276, 277) is measured. As a result, it is possible to grasp how long a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 275, 276, 277 and the design of the variable display device 278 starts to fluctuate after the player has started playing. it can.

<System including hall management computer and central management device>
Next, a system including a hall management computer and a central management device will be described.

  FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining a system including a hall management computer (hereinafter referred to as a hall control) 900 and a central management apparatus 1000.

  In one amusement hall, a plurality of P stands 2 and CU 3 are installed, and a hall server 801 and a hall controller 900 connected to the plurality of P stands 2 and CU 3 are installed one by one.

  The hall control 900 is directly connected to the hall server 801. The hall control 900 includes an arithmetic device and an internal memory (not shown), and is configured to execute predetermined arithmetic processing based on data stored in the internal memory. The hall server 801 is connected to a plurality of CUs 3, and collects output signals from the plurality of CUs 3 and transmits them to the hall control 900.

  The central management device 1000 is installed at a place different from each game hall. The central management device 1000 is communicably connected to a plurality of hall computers 900 installed in a plurality of game halls, respectively. The central management apparatus 1000 acquires and manages a plurality of total data (see FIGS. 45 to 48) totaled by the CU 3 of each game hall by the above-described totaling process from a plurality of game halls for each type of P 2. .

<Summary calculation processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900 collects the results of aggregation processing (see FIGS. 45 to 48 described above) performed by each CU3 in its own store (the game arcade where it is installed) by type and gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as the following). Summarization processing).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure of summary tabulation processing performed by the hall control 900.

  At S50, hall control 900 aggregates the results of the aggregation processing performed by each CU 3 in the store in association with the model and machine number of the gaming machine. Note that the aggregation timing may be aggregated every time each CU 3 performs aggregation processing, or may be aggregated collectively at the end of business on the day.

  In step S51, the hall control 900 executes a summary tabulation process using the aggregated data.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating the contents of summary summary data obtained as a result of summary summary processing. As shown in FIG. 56, the hall control 900 uses the result of the aggregation processing by each CU 3 (see the aggregated data illustrated in FIGS. 45 to 48 above) as the gaming machine model (model X, model Y, model Z,... ) Data is collected separately and by machine number (001, 002...). Further, as shown in FIG. 56, the hall control 900 also counts the total and average for each model.

  Returning to FIG. 55, in S52, hall control 900 determines whether or not there is a display request for a summary count result. The summary count display request is input by, for example, a store clerk at the store. If there is a request to display the summary count result (YES in S52), the process proceeds to S53, and if not (NO in S52), the process ends.

  In S52, hall control 900 displays the summary count result. The display location may be a display (not shown), for example.

  As described above, the hall control 900 according to the present embodiment aggregates the result of the aggregation processing of each gaming machine in its own store by machine type and gaming machine (unit number). By referring to the aggregation result, it is possible to grasp the state of the nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store at once. Therefore, this aggregation result can be effectively used to determine the overall balance of nail adjustment of each gaming machine in the store.

<Threshold range storage processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900 acquires the firing intensity threshold range (see FIG. 51) used when each CU 3 in the store performs the threshold range setting process (see the flow of FIG. 52) from each CU 3 Further, a process of storing for each gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a threshold range storing process) is performed.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram exemplifying data stored in the internal memory of the hall control 900 by the threshold range storage process. As shown in FIG. 57, the hall control 900 determines the firing strength threshold range for each driving area by game machine model (model X, model Y, model Z...) And by machine number (001, 002...). Remember.

  This makes it possible to collectively manage the nail adjustment state (launch strength threshold range) of each gaming machine in the game hall.

<Other store model display processing performed by Hallcon>
The hall control 900 obtains and displays the aggregated data of the types of other stores (amusement halls different from the amusement hall where it is installed) from the central management apparatus 1000 (hereinafter referred to as “other store machine type display processing”). Do).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure of another store machine type display process performed by hall control 900.

  At S60, hall control 900 determines whether or not there is a request to display other store type data. This other store machine type data display request is input to the CU3, the P platform 2, the hall server 801, etc., for example, by a store clerk at a game hall. If there is no other store machine type data display request (NO in S60), the process ends.

  When there is a request to display other store type data (YES in S60), hall control 900 acquires other store type data from central management device 1000 in S61.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram schematically illustrating another store machine type data. As shown in FIG. 59, in the other store model-specific data, aggregate data of other stores (A hall, B hall, C hall...) Is stratified for each model (model X, model Y, model Z...). ing. In addition, the total data as illustrated in the above-described FIGS. 45 to 48 is input in each column of the other store machine type data.

  Returning to FIG. 58, in step S62, the hall control 900 uses the other store machine type data acquired from the central management apparatus 1000 to display the total data of the other game machine type. The display location may be, for example, a display (not shown) connected to the hall control 900, or may be the display 54 of any P unit 2.

  As described above, the hall control 900 according to the present embodiment performs a model-specific display process of acquiring and displaying the aggregated data of the models of other stores from the central management apparatus 1000. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to the state of the nail adjustment according to the model of the other store.

  Note that the data acquired by the hall control 900 from the central management apparatus 1000 is not limited to that shown in FIG.

  For example, in the case where the central management device 1000 aggregates summary summary data (see FIG. 56) for each game hall and calculates average data for each location of the game hall, the hall control 900 stores the average data for each region. It may be acquired from the central management device 1000 and used for adjusting the nail of the own store. Thereby, for example, it is possible to adjust the nail of the own game hall with reference to what kind of nail adjustment is performed by another store in the same area as the own store.

  In addition, when the central management apparatus 1000 has data that summarizes the result of threshold range storage processing (see FIG. 57) stored in the hall control 900 of another store, the data of the other store is automatically stored. The store hall control 900 may be acquired (downloaded) from the central management apparatus 1000 and stored. Thereby, it is possible to set the firing intensity threshold range of the own store with reference to the setting status of the firing intensity threshold range of the other store. Further, the hall control 900 may automatically set the firing intensity threshold range of its own store based on the data of another store acquired from the central management device 1000.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 60, a slot machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine or S unit) 2S is provided such that front door 2bS is openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2aS with its left edge as a swing center. It has been. Although not shown in FIG. 60, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2S in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2S, the number of bets is set by using the game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with the winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2S is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window provided on the front door 2bS. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) of the same type as the display 54, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510 is connected to the CU display control unit 350 in the same manner as the display unit 54 in FIG. 4 and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510 is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position below the start switch 7S shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 5S that is operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) The MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the start switch 7S is operated when the game is started, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively operated when the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on the S machine 2S, first, similarly to the P machine, after securing a game point using the adjacent CU, the number of bets is set using the game point. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use the game points, the single BET switch 5S or the MAXBET switch 6S may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510 is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7S is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7S is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a prize is generated, a game point determined according to the prize is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 1, the S stand 2S is provided with a counting button 28S for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 4). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display unit 510 in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted and the display 510 displays a state in which the points are increased while the game points are decreased. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3 or may be transmitted to the CU 3 as a status information response via the P unit 2 or the S unit (slot machine) 2S. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be excluded is determined by, for example, a main control unit (S) that controls the S base 2S when a start operation is detected. It corresponds to the main control unit 161 of the stand). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2S is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aS by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S platform 2S is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aS in a state of being attached to the board mounting board for connecting the wiring. The board mounting board is a board corresponding to the game board 26 shown in FIG. 3, and includes a connector similar to the convex drawer connector 32 provided on the game board 26.

  To connect a mounting mechanism for mounting the board mounting board and a convex drawer connector on the board mounting board side to a predetermined position (for example, below the reels 2L, 2C, 2R) in the main body frame 2aS of the S base 2S. The connector is provided. The attachment mechanism and the connector have the same structure as the attachment mechanisms 34a and 34b and the concave drawer connector 33 shown in FIG. 3, and are devised so that the board attachment board can be easily fixed to the attachment mechanism. The wiring extending from the concave drawer connector is connected to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, various operation switches (buttons), and the like.

  Similarly to FIG. 36, the S base 2S has a configuration for detecting the opening of the front door 2bS corresponding to the front frame 5 of the P base 2 and detecting the connection between the main body frame 2aS and the board mounting board. The main control board is also connected in series to the loop-shaped power line 500.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 61 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 6 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Here, further explanation is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) In this embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 12, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (additional update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2 and CU3. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (2) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41a, 701, 33, the launch control board 31, and the launch motor 18 of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510 or 29S.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510 or the display 29S, and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. That is, if the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, 1 is added to the betting number setting value and 1 is subtracted from the credit. If the MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510 or the display 29S and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points.
Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming card power. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (5) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may be one using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (6) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (7) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting for counting is displayed on the display of P units or the CU side. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-described “recording medium processing operation for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed as a holding point” is, for example, a card return operation. In addition, the “predetermined process” is a process of recording a score so as to be specified on a card inserted in the CU when a card return operation is detected, and returning the card. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

  (12) If a counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, the counting operation may be invalidated if the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. In addition, even when the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number If the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected is less than the reference value, the counting operation may be invalidated.

  Further, whether or not a game is in progress may be determined based on whether or not a ball launching operation has been detected, and the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27) becomes zero. Whether or not (not in game) or not (in game) may be determined. Further, it is conceivable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine and the counting operation during the game is invalidated is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  (13) Referring to FIG. 12, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (14) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 13 may be a display of “Please count because there are game balls left” in the text, or display the count button 28 on the screen and blink. Such a display may be used. In addition, the P stand 2 that has received the card return preparation state ON may display the game balls on the game ball number display 29 in a blinking manner, or when the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display device. Alternatively, the message described as the above embodiment may be displayed on the game ball number display 29 to prompt the counting operation.

  (15) In order to change the number of game points to be converted in one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (16) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short press operation of the counting button is different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (17) When counting the game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only the count display but also the control to output the counting sound from the speaker 270 may be performed. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (18) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (19) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is the primary station and the gaming machine is the secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (20) In this embodiment, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side. However, game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side. Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (21) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54 may be performed on the display 312 in the same manner.

  (22) In CU3, the number of game balls stored is updated based on the value of the addition ball counter (addition ball count) and the value of the subtraction ball counter (subtraction ball count) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, for hall use). Error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801).

  (23) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (24) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the player is grasping the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (25) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (26) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (27) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 8 to 26 is not limited to a transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3, P stand 2, S stand 2S, etc. For example, CU3, P You may apply to the transmission / reception sequence between several game machines, such as the stand 2, a jet counter, and a POS terminal. 29 and 30 is applied between the CU control unit 323 inside the CU3 and the security chip (SC) 325b, and between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a. May be.

  For example, when processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the CU control unit 323 transmits a game ball addition request message, and consent to this is transmitted. Alternatively, the SC 325b returns a rejection message via the communication control IC 325a based on the response on the P platform 2 side.

  When processing related to a game ball addition request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a, the security chip (SC) 325b transmits a game ball addition request message via the CU control unit 323. Then, the communication control IC 325a returns an approval or rejection message for this based on the response on the P platform 2 side.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the CU control unit 323 and the security chip (SC) 325b, the counting request message is sent from the SC 325b to the CU control unit via the communication control IC 325a based on the request on the P unit 2 side. The CU control unit 323 returns an approval or rejection message for the transmission.

  When the processing related to the counting request is applied between the security chip (SC) 325b and the communication control IC 325a, the communication control IC 325a transmits a counting request message based on the request on the P base 2 side, The security chip (SC) 325b returns a rejection message based on an instruction from the CU control unit 323.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID, but instead of or in addition to that, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the card ID matches the insertion time is stored as the current score by the CU. Control is made so that the score transmitted from the gaming machine is stored as the current score as a further condition that the communication has been started until a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication was interrupted. May be. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and CU3 is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323 at the start of communication between the gaming machine and CU3 (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 matches, as the current score. .

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is withdrawn within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings) and the corresponding game points are added, the value withdrawn. However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (32) In this embodiment, the key management server is installed in the key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (33) The CU control unit 323 receives board security information (including board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800 via the hall server 801. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800 to the CU control unit 323 without using the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and the CU control unit 323. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800 and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801 is provided between the key management server 800 and each CU.

  (34) In the above embodiment, the number of balls automatically counted based on the game interruption operation (simple leaving operation or meal break operation) is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card. By doing so, the player who interrupted the game returns and then returns to the original CU3, and by converting the possession ball into a game ball, 125 balls are converted into game balls. Shown what can be converted to play games. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the interruption operation is stored by the CU 3 as a custody ball different from the gaming ball and the holding ball (also storing the C-ID and the insertion time), and the holding ball is not added. Discontinue processing by ejecting the card without recording the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the interruption operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. It is also possible that information on the custody ball is transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the interruption operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and then discharged, the interruption flag is recorded on the card. So that you can't exchange prizes with that card. As a method for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, it is also possible to adopt the following method other than using the suspended flag of the card.

  First, when an interruption operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player suspended on the hall server side is stored as an interruption card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for prize exchange is an interruption card. Alternatively, all interruption card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for the exchange of the prize is an interrupted card, the exchange of the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game points = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating the recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  (36) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the description has been given by taking the ball number, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the storage ball, the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278 or the display device 54, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (37) In the game ball number display 29, a display is made in which the number of balls is decreased one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 displays such that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29 is constituted by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  In addition, when the counting operation is performed, the game ball number display 29 performs counting display in conjunction with the counting operation, but when the game ball number display 29 is configured by an image display such as a liquid crystal display device. In the same manner as the display 54, the number of game balls may be counted and the number thereof may be decreased, while an image display in which the number of holding balls is increased may be performed. In this case, as described above as a modification of the display of the display unit 54, the display of the number of game balls converted to the number of balls data over time (for example, a bar graph display), the current The number of game balls and the number of balls are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of balls is increased while decreasing the number of balls, or the display of moving a part of the number of balls to the number of balls is repeated. It is possible.

  (38) As shown in FIG. 13, in the above embodiment, the card return operation detected in the state where the game balls remain is counted by detecting the counting operation in a predetermined waiting period. It is activated after completion and shifts to card return processing.

  On the other hand, as a process in the case where the counting operation is not detected even after the standby period elapses, for example, the previous card return operation may be invalidated. In this case, since the counting operation is not detected even when the standby period elapses, the display on the CU3 or P table 2 side may display that the card return operation has been invalidated.

  Alternatively, the card return operation detected with the game balls remaining may be invalidated regardless of whether the counting operation is detected in a predetermined waiting period. In this case, the card return process may be executed again by executing the card return operation after counting all the game balls in accordance with the counting operation after the card return operation is detected. Alternatively, when the counting of all game balls is completed, or before and after that, a display for prompting a card return operation may be performed on the display on the CU 3 or P stand 2 side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if even one game ball remains when a card return operation is detected, the process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. However, the processing shown in FIG. 13 may be executed when the number of game balls remaining when the card return operation is detected is a predetermined number of two or more.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, the counting display speed of the game balls may be made faster than usual. For example, in a normal counting operation, a display in which game balls are counted one by one is displayed, while in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a display in which a plurality of game balls are counted together, or for all games It is conceivable to display such that balls are counted together.

  Further, in the counting operation after the card return operation is detected, not all game balls are counted, but a larger number of game balls than the normal counting operation are counted. It is good. For example, normally, a maximum of 100 game balls are counted as one counting operation, but in a counting operation after a card return operation is detected, a larger number of 200 gaming balls are counted. You may be made to do. Even in this case, when there is a card return operation in advance, the number of counting operations for counting all game balls is reduced compared to when there is no card return operation, and counting of all game balls is completed early. Can do.

  Also, if a card return operation is detected with game balls remaining, even if no counting operation is detected, start counting all game balls, and then proceed to card return processing. Also good. In this case, when counting of all game balls is started, the fact that counting of all game balls is started may be displayed on the P stand 2 or CU3. Alternatively, a message for confirming whether or not the counting of all game balls may be started is displayed, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the touch panel of P stand 2 or CU 3 or a card return operation again) is detected. It is also possible to start counting all game balls on the condition.

  In addition, the card return operation detected during the game (during ball launching) may be invalidated, but the card return operation is not invalidated, and the counting operation during the game is performed on the P platform side. The counting process based on the above may be invalidated.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, CU3 determines whether the number of game balls is 0, when card return operation is detected. However, such a determination may be made by the P base 2. In this case, for example, when a card return operation is detected, data indicating the presence of the card return operation is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the number of game balls stored by the P stand 2 itself is 0. It is determined whether or not. If it is 0, the number of game balls is 0 or data allowing card return is transmitted to CU3, while if it is not 0, the number of game balls is not 0, card return standby or card return prohibition is prohibited. The indicated data is transmitted to CU3.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when operation of a count button is detected, the P stand 2 determines whether card return operation is detected before the detection of the operation. However, such determination means may be provided in the CU3. In this case, for example, when the operation of the counting button is detected, the P base 2 transmits data indicating that to the CU 3. The CU 3 receiving it can be considered to determine whether or not there has been a card return operation within a predetermined period before receiving the data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the P table 2 detects the counting operation, while the CU 3 detects the card return operation, but the CU 3 detects the counting operation, while the P table 2 detects the card returning operation. Alternatively, both the operations may be detected by the P stand 2 or the CU 3. In addition, both the counting button and the card card return button may be attached to the CU 3 or the P stand 2, and one may be the CU 3 or the P stand 2.

  (39) The presence or absence of a change in the number of holding balls or game balls is checked on the CU or P stand. If the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, the fact is notified on the CU or P stand. You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (40) Alternatively, when a player's game ball changes even though the card is not inserted into the CU, the fact may be notified by the CU or P platform. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). Thereby, for example, after the game is finished and the card is discharged, it becomes easy for the store clerk to grasp the stand where the ball caught on the game board wins and the game ball is left as it is paid out.

  (41) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 compares and determines the previous game table information and the latest game table information from the P table 2 with the data stored on its own, and the data on the P table 2 side is not improperly flooded. Confirm that the data is correct. If an error determination is made on the CU3 side, such a situation is simply due to the exchange of CU3 (regular data to be compared is not stored in the CU3 after the exchange), and this is based on fraud. Since there is a possibility that it is not a thing, the store clerk confirms the error and cancels the error with a portable terminal device such as a remote control. However, when the CU 3 is replaced with a new one in this way, the CU 3 may not perform the above error determination at all. Alternatively, the above error determination function may not be provided in the CU 3 regardless of whether or not it has been replaced.

  (42) In the present embodiment, a card, which is a recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player, is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 at the start of the game, and is removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309 after the game ends. The configuration has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card may be placed on the card reading unit at the start of the game and removed from the card reading unit after the game ends. In other words, the recording medium receiving means for receiving the recording medium capable of specifying the valuable value owned by the player may be attached to the recording medium receiving means at the start of the game and removed from the recording medium receiving means after the game ends.

  (43) In the present embodiment, the CU 3 notifies the P stand 2 of the information waiting for card removal, and the P display 2 that has received the notification of the information indicates that “please remove the card”. The configuration for notifying the card removal such as displaying on the card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CU 3 displays “Please remove card” on the display 54 and / or the display 312 while notifying the P stand 2 of information waiting for card removal. It may be configured to notify the card removal on the CU side.

  (44) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2 waits until the card information waiting command including the card removal waiting state = ON until receiving the state information request command including the card waiting waiting state = OFF. The configuration for continuing the notification of sampling has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2 is waiting for card removal = after receiving a status information request command including ON, even if a card removal notification is given for a certain period of time, it is still waiting for card removal = The card removal notification may be intermittently performed after the status information request command including ON is received until the status information request command including OFF is received = OFF.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the P stand 2 receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 when the card is received and communication is restored, and the P stand The configuration has been described in which the “store code” and “SC board ID” held in 2 are determined to match, the recovery process is performed if they match, and the game is prohibited from continuing if they do not match. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the P stand 2 determines whether the “store code” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 matches the “store code” held in the P stand 2 or The “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325 of the CU 3 and the “SC board ID” held in the P platform 2 are determined to match, and if they match, recovery processing is performed and a mismatch is detected. In this case, it may be configured to prohibit the continuation of the game.

  (46) In this embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500 is also wired (power line 500a) in the main control board 16, the connecting portion between the power line 500 of the game board 26 and the power line 500a of the main control board 16 is An example (see FIG. 36 (a)) that functions as main control connection detection means and can detect electrical connection between the game board 26 and the main control board 16 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the loop-shaped power line 500 may also be provided in the main control semiconductor chip 16 a of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16. Thereby, replacement of the main control semiconductor chip 16a can also be detected.

  (47) In this embodiment, since the loop-shaped power line 500 is also wired in the payout control board 17, the connection portion between the front frame 5 and the payout control board 17 functions as a payout control connection detection unit. An example (see FIG. 36A) in which the electrical connection between the frame 5 and the payout control board 17 can be detected is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the loop-shaped power line 500 may also be wired in the payout control semiconductor chip 17 a of the payout control unit 171 provided on the payout control board 17. Thereby, replacement of the payout control semiconductor chip 17a can also be detected. Here, the payout control board 17, the payout control unit 171, the payout control semiconductor chip 17a, and the like are included in the payout control means.

  (48) In the present embodiment, any of the entities that perform the above-described totalization processing, firing intensity correction processing, firing abnormality determination processing, driving area identification processing, and measurement processing can directly receive signals from the P base 2 However, the subject that performs these processes is not limited to CU3.

  For example, if necessary, a main body that performs all or a part of these processes, a hall control 900 that can indirectly acquire a signal from the P stand 2 via a stand terminal or an island terminal, a hall server 801, Alternatively, the central management apparatus 1000 may be used. For example, the hall control 900 may directly perform the counting process (flow in FIG. 42) for each gaming machine.

  Further, if necessary, a main body that performs all or part of these processes may be a calling lamp (not shown) provided for each P base 2. A call lamp is provided for each gaming machine, and has a function of calling a staff member of a game hall by operating a button by a player and a function of displaying a game history such as the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations between jackpots. It is.

  (49) Moreover, you may make it attach an IC tag to a pachinko ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify which pachinko ball is at the time of launch and at the time of passing through any one of the winning areas (winning entrance or gate). For this reason, in the counting process, it is possible to identify the correspondence relationship between the firing intensity T of the same pachinko ball identified by the IC tag and the passing area. As a result, it is possible to more accurately determine which region the pachinko ball tends to pass according to the launch intensity.

  (50) If the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed by a player, the above-described firing intensity correction process cannot be performed. Therefore, it may be detected and notified that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed. Further, when the firing strength is stable at a constant value, it may be determined that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed.

  (51) For example, whether or not the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 can be detected by a touch sensor.

  Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the player is not touching the hitting ball operating handle 25, the above-described firing intensity correction processing may be performed.

  Further, in the firing abnormality determination process, when it is detected that the player does not touch the hitting operation handle 25 and it is detected that the hitting operation handle 25 is fixed, it is determined that there is a launching abnormality. It may be.

  (52) In this embodiment, the hall control 900 acquires the information of the P base 2 via the CU 3. However, the hall control 900 directly receives the information of the P base 2 from the P base 2 without passing through the CU 3. The structure which acquires may be sufficient.

  (53) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the sales information is set in the hall server 801 or the management center 800B has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game device (CU3 or call lamp device) may be configured to set sales information. In particular, when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine that is not an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, the pachinko machine, a call lamp device connected to the pachinko machine (corresponding to a game device), and a hall control connected to a plurality of call lamp devices (management) (Corresponding to the device) may constitute a gaming system.

  (54) In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information set in the hall server 801 or the management center 800B has been described. Absent. For example, sales information may be set on a gaming device, and the gaming device may determine whether or not the current time has passed the business end time (or business start time). The apparatus that performs the determination process may be the same apparatus as the apparatus that performs the sales information setting process, or may be an apparatus on the gaming machine side. In the case of a different device, the device that performs the determination process receives the business information from the device on the higher side (for example, the hall server 801 for the CU 3) and performs the determination process based on the received business information.

  (55) In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the hall server 801 or the CU 3 transmits the business end information (or business start information) to the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the management center 800B may be configured to directly transmit business end information (or business start information) to the gaming machine via the hall server 801 or the CU3. Note that the device that performs the transmission process may be the same device as the device that performs the determination process, or may be a device on the gaming machine side. In the case of a different device, the device that performs the transmission process transmits the business end information (or business start information) received from the device that performs the determination process.

  (56) The apparatus that performs the setting process, the apparatus that performs the determination process, and the apparatus that performs the transmission process may all be the same. For example, the gaming device or the management device (the hall server 801, the management center 800B) sets the business hours of the store where the gaming machine is installed, and based on the set business hours, whether or not the business has ended. It may be configured to transmit to the gaming machine business end information for determining and determining that the business has ended when the gaming machine has ended.

  (57) In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S) receives the business end information, the configuration for restricting the game end notification or gaming at the gaming machine has been described. Absent. For example, when the business end information is the business end time, the gaming machine determines whether or not the current time obtained from the built-in RTC (Real Time Clock) has passed the received business end time. It may be configured to reconfirm and to notify the end of business or limit the game when it is determined that the time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the business end time has passed in the hall server 801 and to check whether or not the business end time has passed in the gaming machine as well. .

  (58) In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a player is a notification target, but a store employee or the store itself may be a notification target.

  (59) The gaming machine may be a case where the notification mode is changed according to the model, or may be a case where the same notification mode is used regardless of the model. For example, for the model A, it may be notified that the business end time has passed only by voice, and for the model B, a business end image may be displayed to notify that the business end time has passed. Moreover, the game machine may be a case where the control content is changed according to the model, or may be the same control content regardless of the model. For example, launching of game balls may be restricted for model A, and lending to game balls may be prohibited for model B.

  (60) In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine receives the business end information, the configuration for notifying the business end or limiting the game on the gaming machine has been described. However, the configuration is configured to notify the business end and limit the game. May be. This can further prevent the gaming machine from operating outside business hours.

  (61) When the game end information is stored in the built-in storage unit E, the gaming machine may be configured so that the game cannot be performed until the business start information is received.

  (62) In the present embodiment, when the P table 2 is in the specific gaming state, the method of delaying notification or restriction based on the business end information received by the P table 2 has been described. It is not limited to this. If it is possible for the P console 2 to postpone notification or restriction, the timing for transmitting the business end information to the P base 2 may be delayed, or the timing for determining that the business end time has passed may be delayed. It may be a method.

  (63) In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the management center 800B is provided for each prefecture, for example, and the business hours set by the regulations of each local government are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be provided in a company unit that manages a plurality of stores, and the business hours of each store may be set.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 16 main control board, 17 payout control board, 26 game board, 54, 312 display, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 319 replay button, 320 IR light receiving unit, 321 Lending button, 322 return button, 161 main control unit, 325 display control unit, 171 payout control unit, 323 CU control unit.

Claims (4)

A gaming machine provided with a gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, a gaming device connected to the gaming machine, and a management device that is connected to the plurality of gaming devices and manages the gaming machine and the gaming device. A system,
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the game hall;
Determination means for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information set by the setting means;
Transmission means for transmitting, to the gaming machine, business end information indicating that the business end time has elapsed when the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time;
The gaming machine is
Receiving means for receiving the business end information transmitted by the transmitting means;
A gaming system comprising: notifying means for notifying that the game hall is closed based on the closing information. A gaming machine provided with a gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, a gaming device connected to the gaming machine, and a management device that is connected to the plurality of gaming devices and manages the gaming machine and the gaming device. A system,
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the game hall;
Determination means for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information set by the setting means;
Transmission means for transmitting, to the gaming machine, business end information indicating that the business end time has elapsed when the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time;
The gaming machine is
Receiving means for receiving the business end information transmitted by the transmitting means;
A gaming system comprising: restriction means for restricting a game on the gaming machine based on the business end information. A gaming device connected to a gaming machine installed in a game hall,
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the game hall;
Determination means for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information set by the setting means;
And a transmission means for transmitting, to the gaming machine, business end information for notifying the elapse of the business end time when the determination means determines that the current time has passed the business end time. apparatus. A gaming machine installed in a gaming hall, and a gaming device connected to the gaming machine, a management device connected to a plurality of the gaming devices,
Setting means for setting sales information including at least information capable of specifying the business end time of the game hall;
Determination means for determining whether or not the current time has passed the business end time based on the business information set by the setting means;
A management device comprising: a transmission unit configured to transmit, to the gaming machine, business end information for notifying the elapse of the business end time when the determination unit determines that the current time has passed the business end time. .

Images